Top Banner
 Rev 1 January 2010 Senior Welding Inspection Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010 Senior Weldin g Inspectio n Contents Section Subject 1 Duties of the Senior Welding Inspector 2 Terms and Definit ions 3 Planning 4 Codes and Standards 5 Calibration of Welding Equipment 6 Destruc tive Testing 7 Heat Treatment 8 WPS and Welder Qualific ation s 9 Materials Inspection 10 Residual Stress and Distortion 11 Weldabilit y of Steels 12 Weld Fractur es 13 Welding Symbols 14 NDT 15 Welding Consum ables 16 GMAW 17 SMAW 18 SAW 19 GTAW 20 Weld Imperfect ion s 21 Weld Repairs 22 Welding Safety 23 Appendices
302

115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

Feb 17, 2018

Download

Documents

Adeoye Okunoye
Welcome message from author
This document is posted to help you gain knowledge. Please leave a comment to let me know what you think about it! Share it to your friends and learn new things together.
Transcript
Page 1: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 1/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Senior Welding Inspection

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010 

Senior Welding Inspection

Contents

Section Subject

1 Duties of the Senior Welding Inspector

2 Terms and Definit ions

3 Planning

4 Codes and Standards

5 Calibration of Welding Equipment

6 Destructive Testing

7 Heat Treatment

8 WPS and Welder Qualifications

9 Materials Inspection

10 Residual Stress and Distortion

11 Weldability of Steels

12 Weld Fractures

13 Welding Symbols

14 NDT

15 Welding Consumables

16 GMAW

17 SMAW

18 SAW

19 GTAW

20 Weld Imperfect ions

21 Weld Repairs22 Welding Safety

23 Appendices

Page 2: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 2/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Duties of the Senior Welding Inspector.

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010 

1 General

The Senior Welding Inspector has primarily a supervisory/managerial role,which could encompass the management and control of an inspectioncontract. The role would certainly include leading a team of WeldingInspectors, who will look to the Senior Welding Inspector for guidance,

especially on technical subjects. The Senior Welding Inspector will beexpected to give advice, resolve problems, take decisions and generallylead from the front, sometimes in difficult situations.

The attributes required by the Senior Welding Inspector are varied and theemphasis on certain attributes and skills may differ from project to project.Essentially though the Senior Welding Inspector will require leadershipskills, technical skills and experience.

2 Leadership Skills

Some aspects on the theory of leadership may be taught in the classroom,

but leadership is an inherent part of the character and temperament of anindividual. Practical application and experience play a major part in thedevelopment of leadership skills and the Senior Welding Inspector shouldstrive to improve and fine tune these skills at every opportunity.

The skills required for the development of leadership include:

•  A willingness and ability to accept instructions or orders from senior staffand to act in the manner prescribed.

•  A willingness and ability to give orders in a clear and concise manner,whether verbal or written, which will leave the recipient in no doubt as towhat action or actions are required.

•  A willingness to take responsibility, particularly when things go wrong,perhaps due to the Senior Welding Inspector’s direction, or lack of it.

•  A capacity to listen (the basis for good communication skills) if and whenexplanations are necessary, and to provide constructive reasoning andadvice.

•  A willingness to delegate responsibility to allow staff to get on with the job and to trust them to act in a professional manner. The SeniorWelding Inspector should, wherever possible, stay in the background,managing.

•  A willingness and ability to support members of the team on technicaland administrative issues.

Page 3: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 3/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Duties of the Senior Welding Inspector.

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010 

3 Technical Skills

 A number of factors make up the technical skills required by the SeniorWelding Inspector and these are a knowledge of:

•  Technology;

•  Normative documents;•  Planning;

•  Organisation;

•  Auditing;

4 Knowledge of Technology

Welding technology knowledge required by the Senior Welding Inspector isvery similar to that required by the Welding Inspector, but with someadditional scope and depth.

Certain areas where additional knowledge is required are:

•  A knowledge of quality assurance and quality control.

•  A sound appreciation of the four commonly used non-destructive testingmethods.

•  A basic understanding of steel metallurgy for commonly weldedmaterials and the application of this understanding to the assessment offracture surfaces.

•  Assessment of non-destructive test reports, particularly the interpretationof radiographs.

5 Knowledge of Normative Documents 

It is not a requirement for Inspectors at any level to memorise the content ofrelevant normative documents, except possibly with the exception of takingexaminations.

Specified normative documents (specifications, standards, codes ofpractice, etc) should be available at the workplace and the Senior WeldingInspector would be expected to read, understand and apply therequirements with the necessary level of precision and direction required.

The Senior Welding Inspector should be aware of the more widely usedstandards as applied in welding and fabrication. For example:

BS EN ISO 15614 / ASME IX Standards for welding procedureapproval

BS 4872, BS EN 287 / ASME IX Standards for welder approval.

PED BS 5500 / ASME VIII Standards for quality of fabrication.

BS EN ISO 9000 – 2000 Standards for quality management.

Page 4: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 4/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Duties of the Senior Welding Inspector.

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010 

6 Knowledge of Planning

 Any project or contract will require some planning if inspection is to becarried out effectively and within budget.

See unit: Planning for more detailed information.

7 Knowledge of Organisation

The Senior Welding Inspector must have good organisational skills in orderto ensure that the inspection requirements of any quality/inspection plan canbe met, within the allocated time, budget and using the most suitablepersonnel for the activity. Assessment of suitable personnel may requireconsideration of their technical, physical and mental abilities in order toensure that they are able to perform the tasks required of them. Otherconsiderations would include availability of inspection personnel at the timerequired, levels of supervision and the monitoring of the inspector’s activitiesform start to contract completion.

8 Knowledge of Quality/Auditing

There are many situations in manufacturing or on a project where the SeniorWelding Inspector may be required to carry out audits.

See section on: Quality Assurance/Quality Control and Inspection for moredetailed information.

9 Man Management

 As mentioned above, the Senior Welding Inspector will have to direct and

work with a team of Inspection personnel which he may well have to pick.He will have to liaise with Customer representatives, sub-contractors andthird party Inspectors. He may have to investigate non-compliances, dealwith matters of discipline as well as personal matters of his staff.

To do this effectively he needs skills in man management.

10 Recruitment

When recruiting an individual or a team the SWI will first have to establishthe requirements of the work. Among them would be:

•  What skills are definitely required for the work and what additional oneswould be desirable?

•  Are particular qualifications needed?

•  Is experience of similar work desirable?

•  What physical attributes are needed?

•  Is the work local, in-shop, on-site, in a third world country?

•  Does the job require working unsociable hours being away from homefor long periods?

Page 5: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 5/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Duties of the Senior Welding Inspector.

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010 

•  Is the job for permanent staff or for a fixed term?

•  If overseas what are the leave and travel arrangements?

•  What is the likely salary?

During subsequent interviews the SWI will need to assess other aspects ofthe candidates’ suitability:

•  Has he the ability to work on his own initiative?

•  Can he work as part of a team?

•  If overseas has the person been to a similar location?

•  What is his marital/home situation?

•  Are there any Passport/Visa problems likely?

11 Morale and Motivation

The morale of a workforce has a significant effect on its performance so theSWI must strive to keep the personnel happy and motivated and be able to

detect signs of low morale.

Low morale can lead to among other things:

•  Poor productivity, less good workmanship, lack of diligence, taking shortcuts, ignoring safety procedures and higher levels of absenteeism.

The SWI needs to be able to recognise these signs and others such aspersonnel not starting work promptly, taking longer breaks, talking in groupsand grumbling about minor matters.

 A good supervisor should not allow his workforce to get into such a state.

He must keep them motivated by:

•  His own demeanour – does he have drive and enthusiasm or is heseen to have no energy and generally depressed. The workforce willreact accordingly.

•  Is he seen to be leading from the front in a fair and consistent manner?

•  Favouritism in the treatment of staff, on disciplinary matters, theallocation of work, allotment of overtime, weekend working andholidays are common causes of problems

•  Keep them informed in all aspects of the job and their situation.Rumours of impending redundancies or cuts in allowances etc will notmake for good morale.

Page 6: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 6/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Duties of the Senior Welding Inspector.

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010 

12 Discipline

 Any workforce must be working in a disciplined manner, normally to rulesand standards laid down in the Company’s conditions of employment orrelevant company handbook. The SWI must have a good understanding ofthese requirements and be able to apply them in a fair and equitable

manner.

He must have a clear understanding as to the limits of his authority –knowing how far he can go in disciplinary proceedings.

The usual stages of disciplinary procedure are:

•  The quiet word

•  Formal verbal warning

•  Written warning

•  Possible demotion, transfer, suspension

•  Dismissal with notice

•  Instant dismissal.

Usually after the written warning stage the matter will be handled by theCompany’s Personnel or Human Resources Department.

It is of vital importance that the company rules are rigorously followed asany deviation could result in claims for unfair or constructive dismissal.

In dealing with disciplinary matters the SWI must:

•  Act promptly

•  Mean what he says•  Treat everyone fairly and as an adult.

•  Avoid constant complaining on petty issues

Where there are serious breaches of company rules by one or two peoplethe rest of the workforce should be informed of the matter so that rumourand counter-rumours can be quashed.

Some matters of discipline may well arise because of incorrect workingpractices, passing off below quality work, signing for work which has notbeen done, etc.

Page 7: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 7/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Duties of the Senior Welding Inspector.

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010 

In all such cases the SWI will need to carry out an investigation and applydisciplinary sanctions to the personnel involved. To do this:

•  First establish the facts – by interviewing staff, from the relevantrecords, by having rechecks on part of the job.

•  If any suspicions are confirmed, transfer/remove suspect personnel

from the job pending disciplinary proceedings. If the personnel areemployed by a sub-contractor then a meeting with the sub-contractorwill be needed to achieve the same end.

•  Find out the extent of the problem, is it localised or widespread?

•  Is there need to inform the customer and third party inspector?

•  Formulate a plan of action, with other company departments wherenecessary, to retrieve the situation.

•  Carry out the necessary disciplinary measures on the personnelinvolved.

•  Convene a meeting with the rest of the workforce to inform them of thesituation and ensure that any similar lapses will be dealt with severely.

•  Follow up the meeting with a written memo.

13 Summary

The Senior Welding Inspector’s role can be varied and complex, a numberof skills need to be developed in order for the individual to be effective in therole. Every Senior Welding Inspector will have personal skills and attributeswhich can be brought to the job, some of the skills identified above mayalready have been mastered or understood. The important thing for theindividual to recognise is not only do they have unique abilities which theycan bring to the role, but they also need to strive to be the best they can bystrengthening identifiable weak areas in their knowledge and understanding.

Some ways in which these goals may be achieved is through:

•  Embracing facts and realities.

•  Being creative.

•  Being interested in solving problems.

•  Being pro-active not reactive

•  Having empathy with other people.

•  Having personal values.

•  Being objective.

Page 8: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 8/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Terms and Definitions

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010

Note:The following definitions are taken from BS 499-1:1991 “Welding terms andsymbols – Glossary for welding, brazing and thermal cutting” 

Welding:  An operation in which two or more parts are united by means of heat,

pressure or both, in such a way that there is continuity in the nature of themetal between these parts.

Brazing: A process of joining generally applied to metals in which, during or afterheating, molten filler metal is drawn into or retained in the space betweenclosely adjacent surfaces of the parts to be joined by capillary attraction. In

general, the melting point of the filler metal is above 450°C but always belowthe melting temperature of the parent material.

Braze welding:The joining of metals using a technique similar to fusion welding and a filler

metal with a lower melting point than the parent metal, but neither usingcapillary action as in brazing nor intentionally melting the parent metal.

Weld:  A union of pieces of metal made by welding.

Joint: Connection where the individual components, suitably prepared andassembled, are joined by welding or brazing.

Page 9: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 9/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Terms and Definitions

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010

Type of joint Sketch Definition

Butt joint A connection between the endsor edges of two parts making an

angle to one another of 135°  to

180° inclusive in the region of the joint

T joint A connection between the end oredge of one part and the face ofthe other part, the parts makingan angle to one another of more

than 5° up to and including 90° inthe region of the joint

Corner joint A connection between the endsor edges of two parts making an

angle to one another of morethan 30° but less than 135° in theregion of the joint

Edge joint A connection between the edgesof two parts making an angle to

one another of 0° to 30° inclusivein the region of the joint

Cruciform joint A connection in which two flatplates or two bars are welded toanother flat plate at right anglesand on the same axis

Lap joint A connection between two over-lapping parts making an angle to

one another of 0°  to 5°  inclusivein the region of the weld or welds

Page 10: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 10/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Terms and Definitions

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010

1 Types of Welds

1.1 From configuration point of view

Butt weld Fillet weld 

 Autogenous weld:  A fusion weld made without filler metal. Can be achieved by TIG, plasmaelectron beam, laser or oxy-fuel gas welding.

Slot weld:  A joint between two overlapping components made by depositing a filletweld round the periphery of a hole in one component so as to join it to thesurface of the other component exposed through the hole.

Butt weld

In a butt oint

In a T oint

In a corner oint

Page 11: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 11/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Terms and Definitions

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010

Plug weld:  A weld made by filling a hole in one component of a workpiece with fillermetal so as to join it to the surface of an overlapping component exposedthrough the hole (the hole can be circular or oval).

1.2 From the penetration point of view

Full penetration weld: A welded joint where the weld metal fully penetrates the joint with completeroot fusion. In US the preferred term is complete joint penetration weld orCJP for short (see AWS D1.1.)

Partial penetration weld: A welded joint without full penetration. In US the preferred term is partial joint penetration weld or PJP for short.

2 Types of Joint (see BS EN ISO 15607)

Homogeneous joint:Welded joint in which the weld metal and parent material have no significantdifferences in mechanical properties and/or chemical composition. Example:two carbon steel plates welded with a matching carbon steel electrode.

Heterogeneous jo int:Welded joint in which the weld metal and parent material have significantdifferences in mechanical properties and/or chemical composition. Example:a repair weld of a cast iron item performed with a nickel base electrode.

Dissimilar joint:Welded joint in which the parent materials have significant differences inmechanical properties and/or chemical composition. Example: a carbonsteel lifting lug welded onto an austenitic stainless steel pressure vessel.

Page 12: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 12/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Terms and Definitions

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010

3 Features of the Completed Weld

Parent metal:Metal to be joined or surfaced by welding, braze welding or brazing.

Filler metal:

Metal added during welding, braze welding, brazing or surfacing.

Weld metal: All metal melted during the making of a weld and retained in the weld.

Heat-affected zone (HAZ):The part of the parent metal that is metallurgically affected by the heat ofwelding or thermal cutting, but not melted.

Fusion line:Boundary between the weld metal and the HAZ in a fusion weld. This is anon-standard term for weld junction.

Weld zone:The zone containing the weld metal and the HAZ.

Weld face:The surface of a fusion weld exposed on the side from which the weld hasbeen made.

Root:The zone on the side of the first run farthest from the welder.

Toe:

Boundary between a weld face and the parent metal or between runs. Thisis a very important feature of a weld since toes are points of high stressconcentration and often they are initiation points for different types of cracks(eg fatigue cracks, cold cracks). In order to reduce the stress concentration,toes must blend smoothly into the parent metal surface.

Excess weld metal:Weld metal lying outside the plane joining the toes. Other non-standardterms for this feature: reinforcement, overfill.

Page 13: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 13/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Terms and Definitions

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010

Root

Parentmetal

Weldmetal

HAZ

Weldzone

Fusionline

Weldface Toe

Parentmetal

Excessweld metal

Excessweld metal

Butt weld

Fusionline

Weldmetal

Root

Parentmetal

HAZ

Weld

zone

Weldface

Toe

Parentmetal

Excessweld metal

Fillet weld

Page 14: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 14/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Terms and Definitions

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010

4 Weld Preparation

 A preparation for making a connection where the individual components,suitably prepared and assembled, are joined by welding or brazing.

4.1 Features of the weld preparation

 Angle of bevel:The angle at which the edge of a component is prepared for making a weld.In case of a V preparation for a MMA weld on carbon steel plates, this angle

is between 25-30°. In the case of a U preparation for an MMA weld on

carbon steel plates, this angle is between 8-12°. In case of a single bevelpreparation for an MMA weld on carbon steel plates, this angle is between

40-50°. In case of a single J preparation for a MMA weld on carbon steel

plates, this angle is between 10-20°.

Included angle:The angle between the planes of the fusion faces of parts to be welded. In

the case of single V, single U, double V and double U this angle is twice thebevel angle. In case of single bevel, single J, double bevel and double J, theincluded angle is equal to the bevel angle.

Root face:The portion of a fusion face at the root that is not bevelled or grooved. Itsvalue depends on the welding process used, parent material to be weldedand application; for a full penetration weld on carbon steel plates, it has avalue between 1-2mm (for the common welding processes).

Gap:The minimum distance at any cross section between edges, ends or

surfaces to be joined. Its value depends on the welding process used andapplication; for a full penetration weld on carbon steel plates, it has a valuebetween 1-4mm.

Root radius:The radius of the curved portion of the fusion face in a component preparedfor a single J, single U, double J or double U weld. In case of MMA,MIG/MAG and oxyfuel gas welding on carbon steel plates, the root radiushas a value of 6mm in case of single and double U preparations and 8mm incase of single and double J preparations.

Land:The straight portion of a fusion face between the root face and the curvedpart of a J or U preparation, can be 0. Usually present in case of weldpreparations for MIG welding of aluminium alloys.

Page 15: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 15/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Terms and Definitions

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010

4.2 Types of preparation

Open square butt preparation

This preparation is used for welding thin components, either from one orboth sides. If the root gap is zero (ie if components are in contact), thispreparation becomes a closed square butt preparation (not recommendeddue to the lack of penetration problems!).

Single V preparation

The V preparation is one of the most common preparations used in welding;it can be produced using flame or plasma cutting (cheap and fast). Forthicker plates a double V preparation is preferred since it requires less fillermaterial to complete the joint and the residual stresses can be balanced onboth sides of the joint resulting in lower angular distortion.

 Angle ofbevel

Included angle

Gap Root face

Page 16: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 16/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Terms and Definitions

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010

Double V preparation

The depth of preparation can be the same on both sides (symmetric doubleV preparation) or deeper on one side (asymmetric double V preparation).Usually, in this situation the depth of preparation is distributed as 2/3 of thethickness of the plate on the first side with the remaining 1/3 on thebackside. This asymmetric preparation allows for a balanced weldingsequence with root back gouging, giving lower angular distortions. Whilstsingle V preparation allows welding from one side, double V preparationrequires both sides access (the same applies for all double side

preparations).

Single U preparation

U preparation can be produced only by machining (slow and expensive).However, tighter tolerances obtained in this case provide for a better fit-upthan in the case of V preparations. Usually it is applied for thicker platescompared with single V preparation (requires less filler material to complete

the joint and this lead to lower residual stresses and distortions). Similar withthe V preparation, in case of very thick sections a double U preparation canbe used.

Included angle

 Angle ofbevel

Root 

radius

Rootface 

Gap

Land 

Page 17: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 17/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Terms and Definitions

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010

Double U preparation

Usually this type does not require a land (exception: aluminium alloys).

Single V preparation w ith backing st rip

Backing strips allow the production of full penetration welds with increasedcurrent and hence increased deposition rates/productivity without thedanger of burn-through. Backing strips can be permanent or temporary.Permanent types are of the same material being joined and are tack weldedin place. The main problems related with this type of weld are poor fatigueresistance and the probability of crevice corrosion between the parent metaland the backing strip. It is also difficult to examine by NDT due to the built-increvice at the root of the joint. Temporary types include copper strips,ceramic tiles and fluxes.

Single bevel preparation

Page 18: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 18/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Terms and Definitions

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010

Double bevel preparation

Single J preparation

Double J preparation

 All these preparations (single/double bevel and single/double J) can be usedon T joints as well. Double preparations are recommended in case of thicksections. The main advantage of these preparations is that only onecomponent is prepared (cheap, can allow for small misalignments).

For further details regarding weld preparations, please refer to BS EN ISO9692 standard.

Page 19: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 19/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Terms and Definitions

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010

5 Size of Butt Welds

Full penetration butt weld

Partial penetration but t weld

 As a general rule:

 Actual throat thickness = design throat thickness + excess weld metal.

Full penetration butt weld ground flush

Butt weld between two plates of different thickness

Run (pass):The metal melted or deposited during one passage of an electrode, torch orblowpipe.

Single run weld Multi run weldLayer : A stratum of weld metal consisting of one or more runs.

 Actual throat

thickness

Design throat

thickness

 Actual throat thickness= design throat thickness

Design throatthickness

 Actual throatthickness

Design throat thickness= thickness of  thethinner plate

 Actual throat thickness =maximum thicknessthrough the joint

Page 20: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 20/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Terms and Definitions

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010

Types of butt weld (from accessibility point of view):

Single side weld Double side weld

6 Fillet Weld

 A fusion weld, other than a butt, edge or fusion spot weld, which isapproximately triangular in transverse cross section.

6.1 Size of fil let welds

Unlike butt welds, fillet welds can be defined using several dimensions.

 Actual throat th ickness :The perpendicular distance between two lines, each parallel to a line joiningthe outer toes, one being a tangent at the weld face and the other beingthrough the furthermost point of fusion penetration

Design throat thickness:The minimum dimension of throat thickness used for purposes of design. Also known as effective throat thickness. Symbolised on the drawing with‘a’.

Leg length:

The distance from the actual or projected intersection of the fusion facesand the toe of a fillet weld, measured across the fusion face. Symbolised onthe drawing with ‘z'.

Leg length

 Actual throat thickness 

Design throat 

thickness Leg length

Page 21: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 21/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Terms and Definitions

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010

6.2 Shape of fil let welds

Mitre fillet weld:Flat face fillet weld in which the leg lengths are equal within the agreedtolerance. The cross section area of this type of weld is considered to be aright angle isosceles triangle with a design throat thickness ‘a’ and a leg

length ‘z’. The relation between design throat thickness and leg length is:  

a = 0,707 z. or z = 1,41 a.

Convex fillet weld: Fillet weld in which the weld face is convex. The above relation between theleg length and the design throat thickness written in case of mitre fillet weldsis also valid for this type of weld. Since there is an excess weld metalpresent in this case, the actual throat thickness is bigger than the designthroat thickness. 

Concave fillet weld:Fillet weld in which the weld face is concave. The above relation betweenthe leg length and the design throat thickness written in case of mitre filletwelds is not valid for this type of weld. Also, the design throat thickness isequal to the actual throat thickness. Due to the smooth blending betweenthe weld face and surrounding parent material, the stress concentrationeffect at the toes of the weld is reduced compared with the previous type.

This is why this weld is highly desired in case of applications subjected tocyclic loads where fatigue phenomena might be a major cause for failure.

Page 22: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 22/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Terms and Definitions

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010

 Asymmetrical fi llet weld :Fillet weld in which the vertical leg length is not equal with the horizontal leglength. The relation between the leg length and the design throat thicknesswritten in case of mitre fillet welds is not valid for this type of weld becausethe cross section is not an isosceles triangle.

Throat

size

Verticalleg size

Horizontal

leg size

Deep penetration fi llet weld :Fillet weld with a deeper than normal penetration. It is produced using highheat input welding processes (ie SAW or MAG with spray transfer). Thistype of weld uses the benefits of greater arc penetration to obtain therequired throat thickness whilst reducing the amount of deposited metalneeded, thus leading to a reduction in residual stress level. In order toproduce a consistent and constant penetration, the travel speed must bekept constant, at a high value. As a consequence, this type of weld isusually produced using mechanised or automatic welding processes. Also,the high depth-to-width ratio increases the probability of solidificationcentreline cracking. In order to differentiate this type of welds from theprevious types, the throat thickness is symbolised with ‘s’ instead of ‘a’.

Page 23: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 23/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Terms and Definitions

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010

6.3 Compound of butt and fillet welds

 A combination of butt and fillet welds used in case of T joints with full orpartial penetration or butt joints between two plates with different thickness.Fillet welds added on top of the groove welds improve the blending of weldface towards parent metal surface and reduce the stress concentration at

the toes of the weld.

7 Welding Posit ion, Weld Slope and Weld RotationWeld position:The orientation of a weld expressed in terms of working position, weld slopeand weld rotation (for further details, please see ISO 6947). 

Weld slope:The angle between root line and the positive X axis of the horizontalreference plane, measured in mathematically positive direction (ie counter-clockwise).

Weld rotation The angle between the centreline of the weld and the positive Z axis or aline parallel to the Y axis, measured in the mathematically positive direction(ie counter-clockwise) in the plane of the transverse cross section of theweld in question.

Double bevel compound weld

Filletweld

Bevelweld

Page 24: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 24/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Terms and Definitions

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010

Welding position Sketch Definition

Flat A welding position in whichthe welding is horizontal,with the centreline ofthe weld vertical. Symbolaccording ISO 6947 – PA.

Horizontal-vertical A welding position in whichthe welding is horizontal(applicable in case of filletwelds). Symbol accordingISO 6947 – PB

Horizontal A welding position in whichthe welding is horizontal,with the centreline of the

weld horizontal. Symbolaccording ISO 6947 – PC

Vertical up A welding position in whichthe welding is upwards.Symbol according ISO 6947 – PF.

Vertical down A welding position in which

the welding is downwards.Symbol according ISO 6947 – PG

Overhead A welding position in whichthe welding is horizontal andoverhead, with the centre-line of the weld vertical.Symbol according ISO 6947 – PE.

Horizontal-overhead  A welding position in whichthe welding is horizontal andoverhead (applicable incase of fillet welds). Symbolaccording ISO 6947 – PD.

PF

PG

Page 25: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 25/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Terms and Definitions

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010

Tolerances for the welding posit ions

8 Weaving

Transverse oscillation of an electrode or blowpipe nozzle during thedeposition of weld metal. This technique is generally used for vertical upwelds.

Stringer bead: A run of weld metal made with little or no weaving motion.

Page 26: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 26/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Planning.

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010 

1 General

The Senior Welding Inspector would almost certainly be involved in planningfor inspection at one or more of the following stages of a project;

•  Pre-contract   – Identification of the job requirements, recruiting and

allocating suitably trained and qualified staff, gathering togetherrelevant normative documents, technical data and drawings, producingwork/inspection schedules and quality plans as well as generaladministration.

•  In-contract  – Application of inspection methodologies to therequirements of the contract specification, production and collection ofinspection and test reports/documentation.

•  Post-contract – Compilation of inspection reports, certification and testdata.

There are a number of methods of planning for inspection activities, themethod selected being dependant on a number of factors, primarily the

requirements of the client and the specific project.

The various methods are;

In-situ inspection; an inspector(s) placed permanently at the work place. Theinspector would be expected to work independently, responsible for usingthe allocated inspection time in a useful and expedient manner. Periodicvisits to the work place would be made by the Senior Inspector.

2 Gantt Charts

Gantt charts define stages of production and estimated work time for eachstage.

 A Gantt chart is a popular type of bar chart/graph that illustrates a projectschedule ie list of a project's terminal elements. Terminal elements comprisethe work breakdown structure (WBS) of the project and are the lowestactivity or deliverable, with intended start and finish dates. Terminalelements are not further subdivided,

Terminal elements are the items that are estimated in terms of resourcerequirements, budget and duration linked by dependencies and schedules.

 An example of a typical Gantt chart that could be used to plan inspectionactivities for either manufacturing or construction is shown below.

The WBS/task elements are listed on the left hand side and the start andcompletion of each activity is represented by a bar to the right of the activity.

The time period in this example is represented in months, both planned andactual. Some Gantt charts may show time in weeks, which can also bebroken down into days.

Page 27: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 27/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Planning.

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010 

Example of a Gantt chart

 ANY PROJECT PHASE 1 INSPECTION SCHEDULE.

WorkBreakdownStructure

(WBS)

2010

J ANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH  APRIL MAY JUNE

Recruit &allocate

inspection staff

Reviewfabrication

drawings

Review WPSs,WPQRs&

WATCs

Witness & test

WPSs, WPQRs

Witness welderqualification

tests

Prepare quality

plans

Visual

inspection offirstproduction

welds

LEGEND

Planned duration

 Act ual dur ation

Planned milestone

 Act ual mi les tone

Page 28: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 28/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Planning.

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010 

3 Critical Path Analysis (CPA)

Critical path analysis (CPA) is a powerful project management tool thathelps to schedule and manage complex projects. Developed in the 1950s tocontrol large defence projects, CPA has been used routinely since then. Aswith Gantt charts, CPA helps plan all tasks that must be completed as part

of a project. They act as the basis both for preparation of a schedule, and ofresource planning. During management of a project, they allow monitoringof achievement of project goals.

CPA can also show where remedial action needs to be taken in order to geta project back on course.

The benefit of using CPA over Gantt charts is that CPA formally identifiestasks which must be completed on time in order for the whole project to becompleted on time, and also identifies which tasks can be delayed for awhile if resources need to be reallocated to catch up on missed tasks.

 A further benefit of CPA is that it helps to identify the minimum length of timeneeded to complete a project. Where there is a need to run an acceleratedproject, fast track, it helps to identify which project steps should beaccelerated in order to complete the project within the available time. Thishelps to minimise cost while still achieving objectives.

The disadvantage of CPA is  that the relation of tasks to time is not asimmediately obvious as with Gantt charts. This can make them more difficultto understand for someone who is not familiar with the technique.

CPA is presented using circle and arrow diagrams. The circles show eventswithin the project, such as the start and finish of tasks. Circles are normallynumbered to allow identification of them. An arrow running between twoevent circles shows the activity needed to complete that task. A descriptionof the task is written underneath the arrow. The length of the task is shownabove it. By convention, all arrows run left to right.

 An example of a very simple diagram is shown below:

This shows the start event (circle 1), and the completion of the ‘Recruit &allocate inspection staff’ task (circle 2). The arrow between the two circlesshows the activity of carrying out ‘Recruit & allocate inspection staff’. Thetime allocated for this activity is 4 weeks.

1 24 Wks

Recruit & allocateinspection

staffSimple Circle and Arrow

0 4A

START

Page 29: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 29/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Planning.

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010 

In the example above, the numbers above the circles show the earliestpossible time that this stage of the project will be reached.

Where one activity cannot start until another has been completed and whenother activities need to be scheduled it is useful to tabulate the terminalelements and allocate time against each activity. For example the inspection

activities for a project could be shown as:

The above tabulated terminal elements can now be shown as an algorithm,see the following example

IDENTIFICATIO

NTERMINAL ELEMENT /

ACTIVITY

SCHEDULED

COMPLETION

TIME

ALLOCATED

 A Recruit & allocate

ins ection staff  To be completed first 4 weeks

B

Review fabrication

drawings, material &

consumable certificates

Start when A is

completed 2 weeks

C

Review WPS’s, WPQR’s

& WATC’s

Start when A is

completed 2 weeks

D

Witness & test WPS’s &

WPQR’s

Start when B is

completed

3 weeks

E

Witness welder qualification

tests

Start when C is

completed 2 weeks

F

Prepare quality plans &

identify inspection

requirements

Start when C, D & E

are completed

2 weeks

G Visual inspection andtesting of production

welds

Start when F iscompleted 9 weeks

TOTAL TIME ALLOCATED 24 weeks

Page 30: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 30/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Planning.

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010 

1 2 3 5 6

4

AB D

CE

F

4 Wks 2 Wks 3 Wks 2 Wks 9

2

Wks

2

Wks0 4 6

6

11 13

START

Critical path analysis for inspection project.

Page 31: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 31/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Planning.

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010 

In the example, the activities of ‘B & C' cannot be started until 'A' has beencompleted.

This diagram also brings out a number of other important points:

•  Within CPA, reference to activities is made by the numbers in thecircles at each end. For example, task ‘A’ would be called 'activity 1 to

2'.

•  Task 'B' would be 'activity 2 to 3'.

•  Activities are not drawn to scale. In the diagram above, activities are 8,4, 3 and 2 weeks long.

•  In the example the numbers above the circles indicate the earliestpossible time that this stage in the project will be reached.

CPA is an effective and powerful method of assessing:

•  What tasks must be carried out

•  Where parallel activity can be performed•  The shortest time in which you can complete a project

•  Resources needed to execute a project

•  The sequence of activities, scheduling and timings involved

•  Task priorities

•  The most efficient way of shortening time on urgent projects.

 An effective CPA can make the difference between success and failure oncomplex projects. It can be very useful for assessing the importance ofproblems faced during the implementation of the plan.

4 Programme Evaluation and Review Technique (PERT)PERT is a variation on CPA but takes a slightly more sceptical view of timeestimates made for each project stage. To use it, estimate the shortestpossible time each activity will take, the most likely length of time, and thelongest time that might be taken if the activity takes longer than expected.

The formula below is used to calculate the time for each project stage:

Shortest time + 4 x likely time + longest time6

This helps to bias time estimates away from the unrealistically short time-scales normally assumed.

 A variation of both CPA and PERT is a technique known as reversescheduling, which the completion date for the last terminal element for theproject is determined and then all other operations are worked back fromthis date, each operation having its own target date.

Page 32: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 32/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Planning.

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010 

5 Summary

The Senior Welding Inspector doe not need to have an in-depth knowledgeof planning and would not be responsible for the planning of inspectionactivities on a large project or contract, this would be the responsibility ofthe planning team or planning department.

IHowever the SWI does need to have a basic understanding of projectplanning as inspection tasks must link in with other terminal activities toensure that inspection tasks are carried out on a timely and cost effectivebasis, in accordance with the planning system being used on a particularproject or contract.

Page 33: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 33/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Codes and Standards

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010 

GeneralThe control of quality in a fabrication and welding situation is achieved byworking to company procedures and codes of construction or standards.The latter may be international, national, company’s own or specific to theparticular client or contract.

Company procedures are usually covered in Quality Manuals the scope ofwhich may vary widely depending upon the size of company, its range ofwork, its working practices and many other factors.

1 Company Manuals

1.1 Quality assurance manual

Quality assurance is defined in IS0 9000 as; ‘part of quality managementfocused on providing confidence that quality requirements will be fulfilled’.

Essentially what the QA manual sets out is how the company is organised,

to lay down the responsibilities and authority of the various departments,how these departments interlink. The manual usually covers all aspects ofthe company structure, not just those aspects of manufacture.

1.2 Quality control manual

Quality control is defined in ISO 9000 as; ‘part of quality managementfocused on fulfilling quality requirements’.

The QC manual will be the manual most often referred to by the SWI as itwill spell out in detail how different departments and operations areorganised and controlled.

Typical examples would be: production and control of drawings, howmaterials and consumables are purchased, how welding procedures areproduced, etc.

Essentially all operations to be carried out within the organisation will havecontrol procedures laid down.

In particular it will lay down how the Inspection  function, whether visual,dimensional or NDT, will be performed. Inspection being defined as ‘theactivity of measuring, examining and testing characteristics of a product orservice and comparing these to a specified requirement’. Such requirements

are laid down in codes of practice and standards.

Page 34: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 34/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Codes and Standards

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010 

2 Auditing

 Auditing is a term originating from accountancy practice which involves anindependent accountant checking the accounts of a company to see if theaccounts are fair and accurate. A similar checking process is now widelypractised in manufacturing and construction industries and inspection

personnel will be involved in the carrying out of this operation.

Different types of audits may be performed:

•  Full audit of a company, usually carried out by a third party such as aCertifying Authority, checking the company for the award of a QAaccreditation system such as ISO 9000 or ASME Stamp.

•  Major audit by a potential customer prior to placement of a largecontract. This is usually carried out to demonstrate the company has allthe necessary facilities, plant, machinery, personnel and quality systemsin place to enable them to successfully complete the contract.

•  Part audits carried out as ongoing demonstration that the quality system

is working properly.

 An example of the latter case would be where a Senior Inspector isresponsible for signing-off the data book or release certificate for a product. After checking that all the necessary documents are in the package and thatthey have been correctly completed and approved where necessary, theSWI would look at a part of the job – a beam, a piece of pipework etc andcrosscheck against the drawings, mill certificates, inspection reports etc thatall comply with the job requirements.

3 Codes and Standards

It is not necessary for the Inspector to carry a wide range of codes andstandards in the performance of his/her duties. Normally the specification ormore precisely the contract specification is the only document required.However the contract specification may reference supporting codes andstandards and the inspector should know where to access these normative

documents.

The following is a list of definitions relating to codes and standards whichthe Inspector may come across whilst carrying inspection duties

3.1 Definitions

Normative document: A document that provides rules, guidelines or characteristics for activities ortheir results.

The term normative document  is a generic term, which covers documentssuch as standards, technical specifications, codes of practice andregulations.*

Page 35: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 35/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Codes and Standards

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010 

Standard: Document established by consensus and approved by a recognised body.

 A standard provides, for common and repeated use, guidelines, rules, andcharacteristics for activities or their results, aimed at the achievement of theoptimum degree of order in a given context. *

Harmonised standards: Standards on the same subject approved by different standardising bodies,that establish interchangeability of products, processes and services, ormutual understanding of test results or information provided according tothese standards*

Code of practice: Document that recommends practices or procedures for the design,manufacture, installation, maintenance, utilisation of equipment, structuresor products.

 A code of practice may be a standard, a part of a standard or independentof a standard*

Regulation: Document providing binding legislative rules that is adopted by anauthority.*

 Authority:  Body (responsible for standards and regulations legal or administrativeentity that has specific tasks and composition) that has legal powers andrights.*

Regulatory authority:  Authority responsible for preparing or adopting regulations*

Enforcement authority:  Authority responsible for enforcing regulations*

Specification: Document stating requirements. Meaning full data and its supportingmedium stating needs or expectations that is stated, generally implied orobligatory.**

Procedure:  Specified way to carry out an activity or a process*. Usually it is a writtendescription of all essential parameters and precautions to be observed whenapplying a technique to a specific application following an establishedstandard, code or specification

Page 36: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 36/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Codes and Standards

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010 

Instruction:  A written description of the precise steps to be followed based on anestablished procedure, standard, code or specification.

Quality plan:  A document specifying which procedures and associated resources shall be

applied by whom and when to a specific project, product, process orcontract*

* ISO IEC Guide 2 – Standardisation and related activities – General vocabulary** EN ISO 9000 – 2000 – Quality management systems – Fundamentals andvocabulary

4 Summary

 Application of the requirements of the quality manuals, the standards andcodes of practice ensure that a structure or component will have anacceptable level of quality and be fit for the intended purpose.

 Applying the requirements of a standard, code of practice or specificationcan be a problem for the inexperienced Inspector. Confidence in applyingthe requirements of one or all of these documents to a specific applicationonly comes with use over a period of time.

If in doubt the Inspector must always refer to a higher authority in order toavoid confusion and potential problems.

Page 37: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 37/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Codes and Standards

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010 

BS NUMBER TITLE

BS 499: Part 1 Glossary of Welding Terms.

BS 709 Methods of destructive testing fusion welded joints and weld metal in steel. 

BS 1113 Specification for design and manufacture of water-tube steam generatingplant. 

BS 1453  Specification for filler materials for gas welding. 

BS 1821 Specification for class I oxy -acetylene welding of ferritic steel pipe work forcarrying fluids. 

BS 2493 Low alloy steel electrodes for MMA welding 

BS 2633 Specification for class I arc welding of Ferritic steel pipe work for carryingfluids. 

BS 2640 Specification for class II oxy - acetylene welding of carbon steel pipe workfor carrying fluids. 

BS 2654 Specification for manufacture of vertical steel welded non-refrigeratedstorage tanks with butt-welded shells for the petroleum industry. 

BS 2901 Part 3:  Filler rods and wires for copper and copper alloys. BS 2926 Specification for chromium & chromium-nickel steel electrodes for MMA 

BS 2926  Specification for chromium & chromium-nickel steel electrodes for MMA 

BS 3019  TIG welding. 

BS 3604 Steel pipes and tubes for pressure purposes; Ferritic alloy steel withspecified elevated temperature properties for pressure purposes. 

BS 3605  Specification for seamless tubes. 

BS 4515 Specification for welding of steel pipelines on land and offshore.

BS 4570 Specification for fusion welding of steel castings.

BS 4677  Specification for arc welding of austenitic stainless steel pipe work forcarrying fluids.

BS 4872 Part 1: Approval testing of welders when procedure approval is not required. Fusionwelding of steel.

BS 4872 Part 2:  TIG or MIG welding of aluminium and its alloys.

BS 6323  Specification for seamless and welded steel tubes for automobile,mechanical and general engineering purposes.

BS 6693 Method for determination of diffusible hydrogen in weld metal.

BS 6990  Code of practice for welding on steel pipes containing process fluids or theirresidues.

BS 7191  Specification for weldable structural steels for fixed offshore structures. 

BS 7570  Code of practice for validation of arc welding equipment.

Page 38: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 38/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Codes and Standards

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010 

BS EN NUMBER TITLE

BS EN 287 Part 1:  Qualification test of welders - Fusion welding - Steels. 

BS EN 440 Wire electrodes and deposi ts for gas shielded metal arc of non-alloyand fine grain steels.

BS EN 499  Covered electrodes for manual metal arc welding of non–alloy and finegrain steels. 

BS EN 3834-Parts 1 to 5

Quality requirements fo r fusion welding of metallic materials

BS EN 756 Wire electrodes and flux wire combinations for submerged arc welding ofnon-alloy and fine grain steels. 

BS EN 760  Fluxes for submerged arc welding. 

BS EN 970 Non-destructive examination of fusion welds - visual examination.

BS EN 910  Destructive tests on welds in metallic materials - Bend tests. 

BS EN 12072  Filler rods and wires for stainless steels. 

BS EN ISO 18274   Aluminium and aluminium alloys & magnesium alloys. Nickel & nickelalloys.

Note: The Inspector should have an awareness of standards that are printed in bold.  

BS EN NUMBER TITLE

BS EN 1011Part 1:Part 2:Part 3Part 4.

Welding recommendations for welding of metallic materials.General guidance for arc welding. Arc welding of ferrit ic steels. Arc welding of stainless steels Arc welding of aluminium and aluminium alloys.

EN 1320  Destructive tests on welds in metallic materials. 

EN 1435  Non-destructive examination of welds - Radiographic examination of welded joints. 

BS EN 10002  Tensile testing of metallic materials. 

BS EN 10020  Definition and classification of grades of steel. 

BS EN 10027  Designation systems for steels. 

BS EN 10045  Charpy impact tests on metallic materials. 

BS EN 10204  Metallic products - types of inspection documents. 

BS EN 22553 Welded, brazed and soldered joints - symbol ic representation ondrawings.

BS EN 24063 Welding, brazing, soldering and braze welding of metal. Nomenclatu reof processes and reference numbers for symbolic representation ondrawings.

BS EN 25817 Arc welded joints in steel. Guidance on quality levels forimperfections.

BS EN 26520 Classif ication of imperfections in metallic fusion welds, withexplanations.

BS EN 26848  Specification for tungsten electrodes for inert gas shielded arc welding andfor plasma cutting and welding. 

Page 39: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 39/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Codes and Standards

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010 

ISO NUMBER: TITLE:

ISO 857 - 1 Welding and allied processes - Vocabulary - Part 1 - Metal weldingprocesses. 

ISO 6947 Welds - Working positions - definitions of angles of slope and rotation.

ISO 9606 – 2 Qualification test of welders – fusion welding.Part 2 Aluminium & aluminium alloys.

ISO 15607 Specifi cation and qualification of welding procedures for metallicmaterials - General rules.

ISO 15608 Welding - Guidelines for a metallic material grouping system.

ISO 15609 - 1 Specifi cation and qualification of welding procedures for metallicmaterials - Welding procedure specification - Part 1: Arc welding.

ISO 15610  Specification and qualification of welding procedures for metallic materials-Qualification based on tested welding consumables. 

ISO 15611  Specification and qualification of welding procedures for metallic materials-Qualification based on previous welding experience.

ISO 15613  Specification and qualification of welding procedures for metallic materials -Qualification based on pre-production-welding test. 

ISO 15614 Specifi cation and qualification of welding procedures for metallic

materials - Welding procedure test.Part 1:Part 2:Part 3:Part 4:Part 5:Part 6:Part 7:Part 8:Part 9:Part 10Part 11Part 12Part 13 

 Arc and gas welding of steels and arc welding of nickel and nickel alloys. Arc welding of aluminium and its alloys*Welding procedure tests for the arc welding of cast irons*Finishing welding of aluminium castings* Arc welding of titanium, zirconium and their alloys.Copper and copper alloys*Not usedWelding of tubes to tube-plate joints.Underwater hyperbaric wet welding*Hyperbaric dry welding*Electron and laser beam weldingSpot, seam and projection welding*Resistance butt and flash welding* 

Note: The Inspector should have an awareness of standards that are printed in bold. *Proposed

.

Page 40: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 40/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Calibration of Welding Equipment

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010 

1 Introduction

BS 7570 - Code of practice for validation of arc welding equipment – astandard that gives guidance to:

•  Manufacturers about the accuracy required from output meters fitted to

welding equipment to show welding current, voltage, etc•  End users who need to ensure that the output meters provide accurate

readings

The Standard refers to two grades of equipment - standard grade andprecision grade.

Standard grade equipment is suitable for manual and semi-automaticwelding processes.

Precision grade equipment is intended for mechanised or automatic weldingbecause there is usually a need for greater precision for all welding

variables as well as the prospect of the equipment being used for higher‘duty cycle’ welding.

2 Terminology

BS 7570 defines the terms it uses - such as:

Calibration:Operations for the purpose of determining the magnitude of errors of ameasuring instrument, etc.

Validation:

Operations for the purpose of demonstrating that an item of weldingequipment, or a welding system, conforms to the operating specification forthat equipment or system.

 Accuracy:Closeness of an observed quantity to the defined, or true, value.

Thus, when considering welding equipment, those that have output metersfor welding parameters (current, voltage, travel speed, etc.) can becalibrated by checking the meter reading with a more accurate measuringdevice – and adjusting the readings appropriately.

Equipment that does not have output meters (some power sources forMMA, MIG/MAG) cannot be calibrated but they can be validated, that is tomake checks to see that the controls are functioning properly.

Page 41: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 41/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Calibration of Welding Equipment

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010 

3 Calibration Frequency

BS 7570 recommends re-calibration/validation at:

•  Yearly intervals (following an initial consistency test at 3 monthlyintervals) for standard grade equipment

•  Six monthly intervals for precision grade equipment.

However, the Standard also recommends that re-calibration/validation maybe necessary more frequently. Factors that need to be considered are:

•  Equipment manufacturer’s recommendations

•  User’s requirements

•  If the equipment has been repaired re-calibration should always becarried out

•  If there is reason to believe the performance of the equipment hasdeteriorated

4 Instruments for Calibration

Instruments used for calibration should:

•  Be calibrated by a recognised calibrator - using standards that aretraceable to a national standard

•  Be at least twice, and preferably five times, more accurate than theaccuracy required for the grade of equipment

•  For precision grade equipment it will be necessary to use instrumentswith much greater precision for checking output meters.

5 Calibration MethodsThe Standard gives details about the characteristics of power source types,how many readings should be taken for each parameter and guidance onprecautions that may be necessary.

Page 42: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 42/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Calibration of Welding Equipment

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010 

For the main welding parameters, recommendations from the Standard areas follows:

Current: Details are given about the instrumentation requirements and how tomeasure pulsed current but there are requirements specified, or

recommendations made, about where in the circuit current measurementsshould be made.

The implication is that current can be measured at any position in the circuit – the value should be the same.

Voltage: The standard emphasises that for processes where voltage is pre-set (onconstant voltage the power sources) the connection points used for thevoltmeter incorporated into the power source may differ from the arcvoltage, which is the important parameter.

To obtain an accurate measure of arc voltage, the voltmeter should bepositioned as near as practical to the arc.

This is illustrated by the figure at the end of this section, which shows thepower source voltage meter connected across points 1 and 7.

However, because there will be some voltage drops in sections 1-2, 3-4 and6-7 due to connection points introducing extra resistance into the circuit, thevoltage meter reading on the power source will tend to give a higher readingthan the true arc voltage.

Even if the power source voltmeter is connected across points 3 and 7

(which it may be) the meter reading would not take account of anysignificant voltage drops in the return cable - section 6-7.

The magnitude of any voltage drops in the welding circuit will depend oncable diameter, length and temperature and the Standard emphasises thefollowing:

•  It is desirable to measure the true arc voltage between points 4-5 but forsome welding processes it is not practical to measure arc voltage soclose to the arc

•  For MMA, it is possible to take a voltage reading relatively close to the arcby connecting one terminal of the voltmeter through the cable sheath asclose as ~2m from the arc and connect the other terminal to theworkpiece (or to earth)

•  For MIG/MAG the nearest practical connection points have to be 3-5 buta change from an air-cooled to a water-cooled torch or vice-versa mayhave a significant affect on the measured voltage

•  Voltage drops between points 5-6 will be insignificant if there is a goodconnection of the return cable at point 6.

Page 43: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 43/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Calibration of Welding Equipment

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010 

The Standard gives guidance about minimising any drop in line voltage byensuring that:

•  The current return cable is as short as practical and is heavy, lowresistance, cable

•  The current-return connector is suitably rated and is firmly attached and

so does not overheat due to high resistance

The standard gives data for line voltage drops (DC voltage) according tocurrent, cable cross section and cable length (for both copper andaluminium cables).

Wire feed speedFor constant voltage (self-adjusting arc) processes such as MIG/MAG thestandard recognises that calibration of the wire feeder is generally notneeded because it is linked to current.

If calibration is required, it is recommended that the time be measured (in

seconds) for ~1m of wire to be delivered (using a stopwatch or an electronictimer).

The length of wire should then be measured (with a steel rule) to anaccuracy of 1mm and the feed speed calculated.

Travel speedWelding manipulators, such as rotators and robotic manipulators, as well asthe more conventional linear travel carriages, influence heat input and otherproperties of a weld and should be checked at intervals.

Most of the standard devices can be checked using a stopwatch andmeasuring rule, but more sophisticated equipment, such as a tacho-generator, may be appropriate.

Page 44: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 44/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Calibration of Welding Equipment

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010 

 An example of a welding circui t (for MIG/MAG)

Power

Source

Wire Feeder

17

{arc voltage4

5

32

6

Page 45: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 45/302

Rev 1 January 2010Destructive Testing

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010 

1 Introduction

European Welding Standards require test coupons that are made forwelding procedure qualification testing to be subjected to non-destructivetesting and then destructive testing.

The tests are called destructive tests because the welded joint is destroyedwhen various types of test piece are taken from it.

Destructive tests can be divided into 2 groups, those used to:

•  Measure a mechanical property – quantitative tests 

•  Assess the joint quality – qualitative tests 

Mechanical tests are quantitative because a quantity is measured – amechanical property such as tensile strength, hardness and impacttoughness.

Qualitative tests are used to verify that the joint is free from defects – theyare of sound quality - and examples of these are bend tests, macroscopicexamination and fracture tests (fillet fracture and nick-break).

2 Test Types, Test Pieces and Test Objectives

Various types of mechanical test are used by material manufacturers/suppliers to verify that plates, pipes, forgings etc have the minimum propertyvalues specified for particular grades.

Design engineers use the minimum property values listed for particulargrades of material as the basis for design and the most cost-effective

designs are based on an assumption that welded joints have properties thatare no worse than those of the base metal.

The quantitative (mechanical) tests that are carried out for weldingprocedure qualification are intended to demonstrate that the joint propertiessatisfy design requirements.

The emphasis in the following sub-sections is on the destructive tests andtest methods that are widely used for welded joints.

Page 46: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 46/302

Rev 1 January 2010Destructive Testing

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010 

2.1 Transverse tensi le tests

Test objectiveWelding procedure qualification tests always require transverse tensile teststo show that the strength of the joint satisfies the design criterion.

Test specimens A transverse tensile test piece typical of the type specified by EuropeanWelding Standards is shown below.

Standards, such as EN 895, that specify dimensions for transverse tensiletest pieces require all excess weld metal to be removed and the surface tobe free from scratches.

Test pieces may be machined to represent the full thickness of the joint butfor very thick joints it may be necessary to take several transverse tensiletest specimens to be able to test the full thickness.

Test methodTest specimens are accurately measured before testing. Specimens arethen fitted into the jaws of a tensile testing machine and subjected to acontinually increasing tensile force until the specimen fractures.

The tensile strength (Rm) is calculated by dividing the maximum load by thecross-sectional area of the test specimen - measured before testing.

The test is intended to measure the tensile strength of the joint   andthereby show that the basis for design, the base metal properties, remainsthe valid criterion.

 Acceptance cri ter iaIf the test piece breaks in the weld metal, it is acceptable provided thecalculated strength is not less than the minimum tensile strength specified,which is usually the minimum specified for the base metal material grade.

In the ASME IX code, if the test specimen breaks outside the weld or fusionzone at a stress above 95% of the minimum base metal strength the testresult is acceptable.

Parallellength

Page 47: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 47/302

Rev 1 January 2010Destructive Testing

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010 

2.2 All-weld tensi le tests

Test objectiveThere may be occasions when it is necessary to measure the weld metalstrength as part of welding procedure qualification – particularly for elevatedtemperature designs.

The test is carried out in order to measure not only tensile strength but alsoyield (or proof strength) and tensile ductility.

 All weld tensile tests are also regularly carried out by welding consumablemanufacturers to verify that electrodes and filler wires satisfy the tensileproperties specified by the standard to which the consumables are certified.

Test specimens As the name indicates, test specimens are machined from welds parallelwith their longitudinal axis and the specimen gauge length must be 100%weld metal.

Round tensile specimen from awelding procedure qualification testpiece

Round tensile specimen from anelectrode classif ication test piece

Page 48: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 48/302

Rev 1 January 2010Destructive Testing

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010 

Test methodSpecimens are subjected to a continually increasing force in the same waythat transverse tensile specimens are tested.

Yield (Re) or proof stress (Rp) are measured by means of an extensometerthat is attached to the parallel length of the specimen and is able to

accurately measure the extension of the gauge length as the load isincreased.

Typical load extension curves and their principal characteristics are shownbelow.

Tensile ductility is measured in two ways:

•  % elongation of the gauge length (A%)

•  % reduction of area at the point of fracture (Z%)

Load-extension curve for a steelthat shows a distinct yield point at

the elastic limit

Load-extension curve for a steel (orother metal) that does not show adistinct yield point; proof st ress is a

measure of the elastic limit

Page 49: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 49/302

Rev 1 January 2010Destructive Testing

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010 

The figures below illustrate these two ductility measurements.

2.3 Impact toughness tests

Test objective

Charpy V notch test pieces have become the internationally acceptedmethod for assessing resistance to brittle fracture by measuring the energyto initiate, and propagate, a crack from a sharp notch in a standard sizedspecimen subjected to an impact load.

Design engineers need to ensure that the toughness of the steel that is usedfor a particular item will be high enough to avoid brittle fracture in serviceand so impact specimens are tested at a temperature that is related to thedesign temperature for the fabricated component.

C-Mn and low alloy steels undergo a sharp change in their resistance tobrittle fracture as their temperature is lowered so that a steel that may have

very good toughness at ambient temperature may show extreme brittlenessat sub-zero temperatures – as illustrated in following figure.

Page 50: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 50/302

Rev 1 January 2010Destructive Testing

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010 

The transition temperature is defined as the temperature mid-way betweenthe upper shelf (maximum toughness) and lower shelf (completely brittle). Inthe above the transition temperature is –20°C.

Test specimensThe dimensions for test specimens have been standardised internationallyand are shown below for full sized specimens. There are also standarddimensions for smaller sized specimens, for example 10mm x 7.5mm and10mm x 5mm.

-50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40

Test temperature, °C

   I  m  p  a  c   t  e  n  e  r  g  y Upper shelf

Lower shelf

Transition range

Ductile fracture(0% crystallinity)

Brittle fracture(100% crystallinity)

Page 51: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 51/302

Rev 1 January 2010Destructive Testing

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010 

Specimens are machined from welded test plates with the notch positionlocated in different locations according to the testing requirements buttypically in the centre of the weld metal and at positions across the HAZ – asshown below.

Charpy V notch test piece dimensions for fu ll sized specimens

Typical notch positions for Charpy V notch test specimens from double V butt welds

Page 52: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 52/302

Rev 1 January 2010Destructive Testing

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010 

Test methodTest specimens are cooled to the specified test temperature by immersion inan insulated bath containing a liquid that is held at the test temperature.

 After allowing the specimen temperature to stabilise for a few minutes it isquickly transferred to the anvil of the test machine and a pendulum hammer

quickly released so that the specimen experiences an impact load behindthe notch.

The main features of an impact test machine are shown below.

Impact specimen on the anvil showing thehammer position at point of impactImpact testing machine

Charpy V notch test pieces – before and after testing

Page 53: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 53/302

Rev 1 January 2010Destructive Testing

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010 

The energy absorbed by the hammer when it strikes each test specimen isshown by the position of the hammer pointer on the scale of the machine.Energy values are given in Joules (or ft-lbs in US specifications).

Impact test specimens are taken in triplicate (3 specimens for each notchposition) as there is always some degree of scatter in the results –

particularly for weldments.

 Acceptance cri ter iaEach test result is recorded and an average value calculated for each set ofthree tests. These values are compared with the values specified by theapplication standard or client to establish whether specified requirementshave been met.

 After impact testing, examination of the test specimens provides additionalinformation about their toughness characteristics and may be added to thetest report:

•  % crystallinity – the % of the fracture face that has crystalline appearancewhich indicates brittle fracture; 100% indicates completely brittle fracture

•  Lateral expansion – the increase in width of the back of the specimenbehind the notch – as indicated below; the larger the value the tougherthe specimen

 A specimen that exhibits extreme brittleness will show a clean break. Both

halves of the specimen having a completely flat fracture face with little or nolateral expansion.

 A specimen that exhibits very good toughness will show only a small degreeof crack extension, without fracture and a high value of lateral expansion.

Page 54: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 54/302

Rev 1 January 2010Destructive Testing

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010 

2.4 Hardness testing

Test ob jectivesThe hardness of a metal is its’ resistance to plastic deformation determinedby measuring the resistance to indentation by a particular type of indenter.

 A steel weldment with hardness above a certain maximum may besusceptible to cracking, either during fabrication or in service, and weldingprocedure qualification testing for certain steels and applications that requirethe test weld to be hardness surveyed to ensure that are no regions of theweldment that exceed the maximum specified hardness.

Specimens prepared for macroscopic examination can also be used fortaking hardness measurements at various positions of the weldment –referred to as a hardness survey.

Test methodsThere are 3 widely used methods for hardness testing:

•  Vickers hardness test – uses a square-base diamond pyramid indenter

•  Rockwell hardness test – uses a diamond cone indenter or steel ball

•  Brinell hardness test – uses a ball indenter

The hardness value being given by the size of the indentation producedunder a standard load, the smaller the indentation, the harder the metal.

Page 55: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 55/302

Rev 1 January 2010Destructive Testing

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010 

The Vickers method of testing is illustrated below.

Both Vickers and Brinell methods are suitable for carrying out hardnesssurveys on specimens prepared for macroscopic examination of weldments.

 A typical hardness survey requires the indenter to measure the hardness inthe base metal (on both sides of the weld), in the weld metal and across theHAZ (on both sides of the weld).

The Brinell method gives an indentation that is too large to accuratelymeasure the hardness in specific regions of the HAZ and is mainly used tomeasure hardness of base metals.

2

ddd   21

+=

Page 56: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 56/302

Rev 1 January 2010Destructive Testing

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010 

 A typical hardness survey (using Vickers hardness indenter) is shownbelow:

Hardness values are shown on test reports as a number followed by lettersindicating the test method, for example:

240HV10 = hardness 240, Vickers method, 10kg indenter load

22HRC = hardness 22, Rockwell method, diamond cone indenter (scale C)

238HBW = 238 hardness, Brinell method, tungsten ball indenter

2.5 Crack tip opening displacement (CTOD) testing

Test objectiveCharpy V notch testing enables engineers to make judgements about risksof brittle fracture occurring in steels, but a CTOD test measures a materialproperty - fracture toughness.

Fracture toughness data enables engineers to carry out fracture mechanicsanalyses such as:

•  Calculating the size of a crack that would initiate a brittle fracture undercertain stress conditions at a particular temperature

•  The stress that would cause a certain sized crack to give a brittle fractureat a particular temperature

This data is essential for making an appropriate decision when a crack isdiscovered during inspection of equipment that is in-service.

Test specimens A CTOD specimen is prepared as a rectangular (or square) shaped bar cuttransverse to the axis of the butt weld. A V notch is machined at the centre

of the bar, which will be coincident with the test position - weld metal orHAZ.

 A shallow saw cut is then put into the bottom of the notch and the specimenis then put into a machine that induces a cyclic bending load until a shallowfatigue crack initiates from the saw cut.

Page 57: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 57/302

Rev 1 January 2010Destructive Testing

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010 

The specimens are relatively large – typically having a cross section B x 2Band length ~10B (B = full thickness of the weld). The test piece details areshown below.

Test methodCTOD specimens are usually tested at a temperature below ambient andthe temperature of the specimen is controlled by immersion in a bath ofliquid that has been cooled to the required test temperature.

 A load is applied to the specimen to cause bending and induce aconcentrated stress at the tip of the crack and a clip gauge, attached to thespecimen across the mouth of the machined notch, gives a reading of theincrease in width of the mouth of the crack as the load is graduallyincreased.

For each test condition (position of notch and test temperature) it is usualpractice to carry out three tests.

Page 58: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 58/302

Rev 1 January 2010Destructive Testing

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010 

Below illustrates the main features of the CTOD test.

Fracture toughness is expressed as the distance that the crack tip openswithout initiation of a brittle crack.

The clip gauge enables a chart to be generated showing the increase inwidth of the crack mouth against applied load from which a CTOD value iscalculated.

 Acceptance cri ter ia An application standard or client may specify a minimum CTOD value thatindicates ductile tearing. Alternatively, the test may be for information so thata value can be used for an engineering critical assessment.

 A very tough steel weldment will allow the mouth of the crack to open widelyby ductile tearing at the tip of the crack whereas a very brittle weldment willtend to fracture when the applied load is quite low and without any extensionat the tip of the crack.

CTOD values are expressed in millimetres - typical values might be<<~0.1mm = brittle behaviour; >~1mm = very tough behaviour.

Page 59: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 59/302

Rev 1 January 2010Destructive Testing

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010 

2.6 Bend testing

Test objectiveBend tests are routinely taken from welding procedure qualification testpieces and sometimes have to be taken from welder qualification testpieces.

Subjecting specimens to bending is a simple method of verifying that thereare no significant flaws in the joint. Some degree of ductility is alsodemonstrated.

Ductility is not actually measured but is demonstrated to be satisfactory iftest specimens can withstand being bent without fracture or fissures abovea certain length.

Test specimensThere are 4 types of bend specimen:

Face bendSpecimen taken with axis transverse to butt welds up to ~12mm thicknessand bent so that the face of the weld is on the outside of the bend (face intension).

Root bendTest specimen taken with axis transverse to butt welds up to ~12mmthickness and bent so that the root of the weld is on the outside of the bend(root in tension).

Side bendTest specimen taken as a transverse slice (~10mm) from the full thickness

of butt welds >~12mm and bent so that the full joint thickness is tested (sidein tension).

Longitudinal bendTest specimen taken with axis parallel to the longitudinal axis of a butt weld;specimen thickness is ~12mm and the face or root of weld may be tested intension.

Page 60: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 60/302

Rev 1 January 2010Destructive Testing

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010 

Test methodBend tests for welding procedure qualification (and welder qualification) areusually guided bend tests.

Guided means that the strain imposed on the specimen is uniformlycontrolled by being bent around a former with a certain diameter.

The diameter of the former used for a particular test is specified in the code,having been determined by the type of material that is being tested and theductility that can be expected from it after welding and any PWHT.

The diameter of the former is usually expressed as a multiple of thespecimen thickness and for C-Mn steel it is typically 4t (t is the specimenthickness) but for materials that have lower tensile ductility the radius of theformer may be greater than 10t.

The standard that specifies the test method will specify the minimum bendangle that the specimen must experience and this is typically 120-180°.

 Acceptance cri ter iaBend test pieces should exhibit satisfactory soundness by not showingcracks or any signs of significant fissures or cavities on the outside of thebend.

Page 61: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 61/302

Rev 1 January 2010Destructive Testing

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010 

Small indications less than about 3mm in length may be allowed by somestandards.

2.7 Fracture tests

2.7.1 Fillet weld fractures

Test objectiveThe quality/soundness of a fillet weld can be assessed by fracturing testpieces and examining the fracture surfaces.

This method for assessing the quality of fillet welds may be specified byapplication standards as an alternative to macroscopic examination.

It is a test method that can be used for welder qualification testing accordingto European Standards but is not used for welding procedure qualification toEuropean Standards.

Test specimens

 A test weld is cut into short lengths (typically ≥50mm) and a longitudinalnotch is machined into the specimen as shown below. The notch profile maybe square, V or U shaped.

Test methodSpecimens are made to fracture through their throat by dynamic strokes(hammering) or by pressing, as shown below. The welding standard orapplication standard will specify the number of tests (typically 4).

Moving pressHammer stroke

Page 62: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 62/302

Rev 1 January 2010Destructive Testing

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010 

 Acceptance cri ter iaThe standard for welder qualification, or application standard, will specify theacceptance criteria for imperfections such as lack of penetration into the rootof the joint and solid inclusions and porosity that are visible on the fracturesurfaces.

Test reports should also give a description of the appearance of the fractureand location of any imperfection

2.7.2 Butt weld fractures (nick-break tests)

Test objectiveThe objective of these fracture tests is the same as for fillet fracture tests.

These tests are specified for welder qualification testing to EuropeanStandards as an alternative to radiography. They are not used for weldingprocedure qualification testing to European Standards.

Test specimensTest specimens are taken from a butt weld and notched so that the fracturepath will be in the central region of the weld. Typical test piece types areshown below.

Test methodTest pieces are made to fracture by hammering or three-point bending.

 Acceptance cri ter iaThe standard for welder qualification, or application standard, will specify theacceptance criteria for imperfections such as lack of fusion, solid inclusionsand porosity that are visible on the fracture surfaces.

Page 63: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 63/302

Rev 1 January 2010Destructive Testing

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010 

Test reports should also give a description of the appearance of the fractureand location of any imperfection.

3 Macroscopic Examination

Transverse sections from butt and fillet welds are required by the European

Standards for welding procedure qualification testing and may be requiredfor some welder qualification testing for assessing the quality of the welds.

This is considered in detail in a separate section of these course notes.

Macro examination Micro examination

Objectives •  Detecting weld defects. (macro)

•  Measuring grain size. (micro)

•  Detecting brittle structures, precipitates.

•  Assessing resistance toward brittle fracture, cold cracking and corrosionsensitivity

Page 64: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 64/302

Rev 1 January 2010Destructive Testing

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010 

European Standards for Destruct ive Test Methods

The following Standards are specified by the European Welding Standardsfor destructive testing of welding procedure qualification test welds and forsome welder qualification test welds.

EN 875  Destructive tests on welds in metallic materials – Impacttests – Test specimen location, notch orientation andexamination

EN 895  Destructive tests on welds in metallic materials –Transverse tensile test

EN 910 Destructive tests on welds in metallic materials – Bend tests

EN 1321  Destructive tests on welds in metallic materials –Macroscopic and microscopic examination of weld

BS EN 10002 Metallic materials - Tensile testing. Part 1: Method of test atambient temperature

BS EN 10002 Tensile testing of metallic materials. Part 5: Method of testat elevated temperatures

Page 65: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 65/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Heat Treatment

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010 

1 Introduction

The heat treatment given to a particular grade of steel by the steelmaker/supplier should be shown on the material test certificate and may bereferred to as the supply condition.

Welding inspectors may need to refer to material test certificates and it isappropriate that they be familiar with the terminology that is used and havesome understanding of the principles of some of the most commonly appliedheat treatments.

Welded joints may need to be subjected to heat treatment after welding(PWHT) and the tasks of monitoring the thermal cycle and checking the heattreatment records are often delegated to welding inspectors.

2 Heat Treatment of Steel

The main supply conditions for weldable steels are:

 As rolled, hot ro lled, hot finishedPlate is hot rolled to finished size and allowed to air cool; the temperature atwhich rolling finishes may vary from plate to plate and so strength andtoughness properties vary and are not optimised;

 Appl ied to  Relatively thin, lower strength C-steel

Thermo-mechanical controlled processing (TMCP), cont rol-rolled,thermo-mechanically rolled Steel plate given precisely controlled thickness reductions during hot rolling

within carefully controlled temperature ranges; final rolling temperature isalso carefully controlled;

 Appl ied toRelatively thin, high strength low alloy steels (HSLA) and for some steelswith good toughness at low temperatures, eg, cryogenic steels

Normalised   After working the steel (rolling or forging) to size, it is heated to ~900°C andthen allowed to cool in air to ambient temperature; this optimises strengthand toughness and gives uniform properties from item to item for aparticular grade of steel;

 Appl ied to  C-Mn steels and some low alloy steels

Page 66: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 66/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Heat Treatment

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010 

Quenched and temperedafter working the steel (rolling or forging) to size, it is heated to ~900°C andthen cooled as quickly as  possible by quenching in water or oil; afterquenching, the steel must be tempered (softened) to improve the ductility ofthe as-quenched steel;

 Appl ied to  Some low alloy steels to give higher strength, toughness or wear resistance

Solution annealed/heat treated  After hot or cold working to size, steel heated to ~1100°C and rapidly cooledby quenching into water to prevent any carbides or other phases fromforming;

 Appl ied to   Austenitic stainless steels such as 304 and 316 grades

 Annealed 

 After working the steel (pressing or forging etc) to size, it is heated to~900°C and then allowed to cool in the furnace to ambient temperature; thisreduces strength and toughness but improves ductility;

 Appl ied to  C-Mn steels and some low alloy steels

Figures 1 to 5 show the thermal cycles for the main supply conditions andsubsequent heat treatment that can be applied to steels

3 Post Weld Heat Treatment (PWHT)

Post weld heat treatment has to be applied to some welded steels to ensurethat the properties of the weldment will be suitable for their intendedapplications.

The temperature at which PWHT is carried out is usually well below thetemperature where phase changes can occur (note 1), but high enough toallow residual stresses to be relieved quickly and to soften (temper) anyhard regions in the HAZ.

There are major benefits of reducing residual stress and ensuring that theHAZ hardness is not too high for particular steels with certain serviceapplications.

Examples of these benefits are to:

•  Improve the resistance of the joint to brittle fracture

•  Improve the resistance of the joint to stress corrosion cracking

•  Enable welded joints to be machined to accurate dimensional tolerances

Page 67: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 67/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Heat Treatment

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010 

Because the main reason for (and benefit of) PWHT is to reduce residualstresses, PWHT is often called stress relief .

Note 1:  There are circumstances when a welded joint may need to benormalised to restore HAZ toughness. However, these are relatively rarecircumstances and it is necessary to ensure that welding consumables are

carefully selected because normalising will significantly reduce weld metalstrength

4 PWHT Thermal Cycle

The application standard/code, will specify when PWHT is required to givebenefits #1 or #2 above and also give guidance about the thermal cycle thatmust be used.

In order to ensure that a PWHT cycle is carried it in accordance with aparticular code, it is essential that a PWHT procedure is prepared and thatthe following parameters are specified:

•  Maximum heating rate

•  Soak temperature range

•  Minimum time at the soak temperature (soak time)

•  Maximum cooling rate

4.1 Heating rate

This must be controlled to avoid large temperature differences within thefabricated item. Large differences in temperature (large thermal gradients)will produce large stresses and these may be high enough to causedistortion (or even cracking).

 Application standards usually require control of the maximum heating ratewhen the temperature of the item is above ~300°C. This is because steelsstart to show significant loss of strength above this temperature and aremore susceptible to distortion if there are large thermal gradients.

The temperature of the fabricated item must be monitored during thethermal cycle and this is done by means of thermocouples attached to thesurface at a number of locations representing the thickness range of theitem.

By monitoring furnace and item temperatures the rate of heating can becontrolled to ensure compliance with code requirements at all positionswithin the item. 

Maximum heating rates specified for C-Mn steel depend on thickness of theitem but tend to be in the range ~60 to ~200°C/h.

Page 68: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 68/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Heat Treatment

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010 

4.2 Soak temperature

The soak temperature specified by the code depends on the type of steeland thus the temperature range required to reduce residual stresses to alow level.

C and C-Mn steels require a soak temperature of ~600°C whereas somelow alloy steels (such as Cr-Mo steels used for elevated temperatureservice) require higher temperatures – typically in the range ~700 to~760°C.

Note: Soak temperature is an essential variable for a WPQR. Thus, it isvery important that the it is controlled within the specified limits otherwise itmay be necessary to carry out a new WPQ test to validate the properties ofthe item and at worst it may not be fit-for-purpose. 

4.3 Soak time

It is necessary to allow time for all the welded joints to experience thespecified temperature throughout the full joint thickness.

The temperature is monitored by surface-contact thermocouples and it is thethickest joint of the fabrication that governs the minimum time fortemperature equalisation.

Typical specified soak times are 1h per 25mm thickness.

4.4 Cooling rate

It is necessary to control the rate of cooling from the PWHT temperature forthe same reason that heating rate needs to be controlled – to avoid

distortion (or cracking) due to high stresses from thermal gradients.

Codes usually specify controlled cooling to ~300°C. Below this temperaturethe item can be withdrawn from a furnace and allowed to cool in air becausesteel is relatively strong and is unlikely to suffer plastic strain by anytemperature gradients that may develop.

Figure 6 is a typical PWHT thermal cycle.

5 Heat Treatment Furnaces

It is important that oil and gas-fired furnaces used for PWHT do not allowflame contact with the fabrication as this may induce large thermalgradients.

It is also important to ensure that the fuel (particularly for oil-fired furnaces)does not contain high levels of potentially harmful impurities – such assulphur.

Page 69: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 69/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Heat Treatment

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010 

6 Local PWHT

For a pipeline or pipe spool it is often necessary to apply PWHT to individualwelds by local application of heat.

For this, a PWHT procedure must specify the previously described

parameters for controlling the thermal cycle but it is also necessary tospecify the following:

•  Width of the heated band (must be within the soak temperature range)

•  Width of the temperature decay band (soak temperature to ~300°C)

Other considerations are:

•  Position of the thermocouples within the heated band width and thedecay band

•  If the item needs to be supported in a particular way to allow movement/avoid distortion

The commonest method of heating for local PWHT is by means of insulatedelectrical elements (electrical ‘mats’) that are attached to the weld.

Gas-fired, radiant heating elements can also be used.

Figure 7 shows typical control zones for localised PWHT of a pipe butt weld.

   T  e  m  p  e  r  a   t  u  r  e ,   °

   C

Figure 1 Typical normalising heat treatment applied to C-Mn and some low alloy steels

Time

~900°C

Normalising

•  Rapid heating to soak temperature (100% austenite)

•  Short soak time at temperature

•  Cool in air to ambient temperature 

Page 70: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 70/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Heat Treatment

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010 

   T  e  m  p  e  r  a   t  u  r  e   °   C

Figure 2 Typical quenching and tempering heat treatment applied to some lowalloy steels 

Time

~ 900°C

Quenching and tempering

•  Rapid heating to soak temperature (100% austenite)

•  Short soak time at temperature

•  Rapid cooling by quenching in water or oil

•  Reheat to tempering temperature, soak and air cool

Quenchingcycle

>~ 650°C

Temperingcycle

Figure 3 Comparison of the ‘cont rol-rolled’ (TMCP) and ‘as-rolled’ conditions (= hotrolling) 

   T  e  m  p  e  r  a   t  u  r  e ,   °

   C ~900°C

 Austenite + ferrite

( γ + α ) 

Ferrite + pearlite

(α )      + iron carbide)

Time

 As-rolledor

hot rolled

Slab heating temperature > ~1050°C

 Austenite( γ ) 

~700°C

Control-rolledor

TMCP 

Page 71: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 71/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Heat Treatment

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010 

Solution heat treatment

•  Rapid heating to soak temp. (100% austenite)

•  Short ‘soak’ time at temperature

•  Rapid cool cooling by quenching into water or oil 

   T  e  m  p  e  r  a   t  u  r  e ,   °

   C

Figure 4 Typical solution heat t reatment (solution annealing) applied to austeniti c

stainless steels 

Time

> ~1050°C

Quenching

   T  e  m  p  e  r  a   t  u  r  e ,   °   C

Figure 5  Typical annealing heat treatment applied to C-Mn and some low alloy

steels 

Time

~900°C

 Annealing

•  Rapid heating to soak temperature (100% austenite)

•  Short ‘soak’ time at temperature

•  Slow cool in furnace to ambient temperature 

Page 72: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 72/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Heat Treatment

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010 

heated bandheated bandtemp.temp.

decaydecay

bandband

temp.temp.

decaydecay

bandband

Weld seam

Figure 7 Local PWHT of a pipe girth seam

PWHT (C-Mn steels)

•  Controlled heating rate from 300°C to soak temperature

•  Minimum soak time at temperature

•  Controlled cooling to ~300°C

   T  e  m  p  e  r  a   t  u  r  e   °   C

Figure 6 Typical PWHT applied to C-Mn steels

Time

~600°C

Soaktime 

~300°C

Controlledheating & cooling

rates

 Air cool

Page 73: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 73/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010WPS and Welder Qualifications

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010 

GeneralWhen structures and pressurised items are fabricated by welding, it isessential that all the welded joints are sound and have suitable propertiesfor their application.

Control of welding is achieved by means of welding procedure specifications

(WPS) that give detailed written instructions about the welding conditionsthat must be used to ensure that welded joints have the required properties.

 Although WPS are shop floor documents to instruct welders, they aredocuments that welding inspectors also need to be familiar with. This isbecause they will need to refer to WPS when they are checking that weldersare working in accordance with the specified requirements.

Welders need to be able to understand WPS and to have the skill to makewelds that are not defective and demonstrate these abilities before beingallowed to make production welds.

1 Qualified Welding Procedure Specifications

It is industry practice to use qualified WPS for most applications.

 A welding procedure is usually qualified  by making a test weld todemonstrate that the properties of the joint satisfy the requirementsspecified by the application standard (and the client/end user).

Demonstrating the mechanical properties of the joint is the principal purposeof qualification tests but showing that a defect-free weld can be produced isalso very important.

Production welds that are made in accordance with welding conditionssimilar to those used for a test weld should have similar properties andtherefore be fit for their intended purpose.

Figure 1  is an example of a typical WPS written in accordance with theEuropean Welding Standard format giving details of all the weldingconditions that need to be specified.

1.1 Welding standards for procedure qualification

European and American Standards have been developed to givecomprehensive details about:

•  How a welded test piece must be made to demonstrate joint properties

•  How the test piece must be tested

•  What welding details need to be included in a WPS

•  The range of production welding allowed by a particular qualification testweld

Page 74: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 74/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010WPS and Welder Qualifications

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010 

The principal European Standards that specify these requirements are:

EN ISO 15614 Specification & qualification of welding procedures formetallic materials – Welding procedure test

Part 1: Arc & gas welding of steels & arc welding of nickel & nickel alloys

Part 2: Arc welding of aluminium and its alloys 

The principal American Standards  for procedure qualification are:

 ASME Sect ion IX for pressurised systems (vessels & pipework)

 AWS D1.1 Structural welding of steels

 AWS D1.2 Structural welding of aluminium

1.2 The qualification process for welding procedures

 Although qualified WPS are usually based on test welds that have beenmade to demonstrate weld joint properties; welding standards also allowqualified WPS to be written based on other data (for some applications).

Some alternative ways that can be used for writing qualified WPS for someapplications are:

•  Qualification by adoption of a standard welding procedure - testwelds previously qualified and documented by other manufacturers

•  Qualification based on previous welding experience - weld joints that

have been repeatedly made and proved to have suitable properties bytheir service record

Procedure qualification to European Standards by means of a test weld (andsimilar in ASME Section IX and AWS) requires a sequence of actions that istypified by those shown by Table 1.

 A successful procedure qualification test is completed by the production of awelding procedure qualification record (WPQR), an example of which isshown by Figure 2.

Page 75: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 75/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010WPS and Welder Qualifications

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010 

1.3 Relationship between a WPQR and a WPS

Once a WPQR has been produced, the welding engineer is able to writequalified WPSs for the various production weld joints that need to be made.

The welding conditions that are allowed to be written on a qualified WPS are

referred to as the qualification range  and this range depends on thewelding conditions that were used for the test piece (the as-run details) andform part of the WPQR.

Welding conditions are referred to as welding variables by European and American Welding Standards and are classified as either essentialvariables or non-essential variables. 

These variables can be defined as follows:

•  Essential variable a variable that has an effect on the mechanicalproperties of the weldment (and if changed beyond the limits specified by

the standard will require the WPS to be re-qualified)•  Non-essential variable a variable that must be specified on a WPS but

does not have a significant effect on the mechanical properties of theweldment (and can be changed without need for re-qualification  butwill require a new WPS to be written)

It is because essential variables can have a significant effect on mechanicalproperties that they are the controlling variables that govern the qualificationrange and determine what can be written into a WPS.

If a welder makes a production weld using conditions outside thequalification range given on a particular WPS, there is danger that the

welded joint will not have the required properties and there are then twooptions:

•  Make another test weld using similar welding conditions to those used forthe affected weld and subject this to the same tests used for the relevantWPQR to demonstrate that the properties still satisfy specifiedrequirements

•  Remove the affected weld and re-weld the joint strictly in accordance withthe designated WPS

Most of the welding variables that are classed as essential are the same inboth the European and American Welding Standards but their qualificationranges may differ.

Some Application Standards specify their own essential variables and it isnecessary to ensure that these are taken into consideration whenprocedures are qualified and WPSs are written.

Page 76: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 76/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010WPS and Welder Qualifications

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010 

Examples of essential variables (according to European Welding Standards)are given in Table 2.

2 Welder Qualif ication

The use of qualified WPSs is the accepted method for controlling production

welding but this will only be successful if the welders have the ability tounderstand and work in accordance with them.

Welders also need to have the skill to consistently produce sound welds(free from defects).

Welding Standards have been developed to give guidance on whatparticular test welds are required in order to show that welders have therequired skills to make particular types of production welds in particularmaterials.

2.1 Welding standards for welder qualification

The principal European Standards that specify requirements are:

EN 287-1 Qualification test of welders – Fusion weldingPart 1: Steels

EN ISO 9606-2  Qualification test of welders – Fusion weldingPart 2: Aluminium and aluminium alloys

EN 1418 Welding personnel – Approval testing of weldingoperators for fusion welding and resistance weld settersfor fully mechanised and automatic welding of metallic

materials

The principal  American Standards   that specify requirements for welderqualification are:

 ASME Sect ion IX Pressurised systems (vessels & pipework)

 AWS D1.1 Structural welding of steels

 AWS D1.2 Structural welding of aluminium

2.2 The qualification process for welders

Qualification testing of welders to European Standards requires test weldsto be made and subjected to specified tests to demonstrate that the welderunderstands the WPS and can produce a sound weld.

For manual and semi-automatic welding the emphasis of the tests is todemonstrate ability to manipulate the electrode or welding torch.

Page 77: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 77/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010WPS and Welder Qualifications

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010 

For mechanised and automatic welding the emphasis is on demonstratingthat welding operators have ability to control particular types of weldingequipment.

 American Standards allow welders to demonstrate that they can producesound welds by subjecting their first production weld to non-destructive

testing.

Table 3 shows the steps required for qualifying welders in accordance withEuropean Standards.

Figure 3 shows a typical Welder Qualification Certificate in accordance withEuropean Standards.

2.3 Welder qualification and production welding allowed

The welder is allowed to make production welds within the range ofqualification recorded on his welder qualification certificate.

The range of qualification is based on the limits specified by the WeldingStandard for welder qualification essential variabless  - defined as: avariable that if changed beyond the limits specified by the WeldingStandard may require greater skill than has been demonstrated by thetest weld. 

Some welding variables that are classed as essential for welder qualificationare the same types  as those classified as essential for welding procedurequalification, but the range of qualification may be significantly wider.

Some essential variables are specific to welder qualification.

Examples of welder qualification essential variables are given in Table 4.

2.4 Period of validity for a welder qualification certificate

 A welder’s qualification begins from the date of welding of the test piece.

The European Standard allows a qualification certificate to remain valid for aperiod of two years – provided that:

•  The welding co-ordinator, or other responsible person, can confirm thatthe welder has been working with in the init ial range of qualification

•  Working within the initial qualification range is confirmed every six months

2.5 Prolongation of welder qualification

 A welder’s qualification certificate can be prolonged every two years by anexaminer/examining body but before prolongation is allowed certainconditions need to be satisfied:

Page 78: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 78/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010WPS and Welder Qualifications

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010 

•  Records/evidence are available that can be traced to the welder and theWPS that have been used for production welding

•  The supporting evidence must relate to volumetric examination of thewelder’s production welds (RT or UT) on two welds made during the 6months prior to the prolongation date

•  The supporting evidence welds must satisfy the acceptance levels for

imperfections specified by the European welding standard and have beenmade under the same conditions as the original test weld.

Page 79: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 79/302

 

Rev 1 July 2008WPS and Welder Qualifications

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2008 

The welding engineer writes a preliminary Welding Procedure Specification(pWPS) for each test coupon to be welded 

•   A welder makes the test coupon in accordance with the pWPS

•   A welding inspector records all the welding condit ions used to makethe test coupon (called the as-run condi tions) 

 An Independent Examiner/ Examining Body/Third Party Inspector may be requested to monitor the procedure qualification

The test coupon is subjected to NDT in accordance with the methods

specified by the Standard – v isual inspection, MT or PT and RT or UT

•   A Welding Procedure Qualificat ion Record (WPQR) is prepared by thewelding engineer giving details of:

»  The as-run welding conditions

»  Results of the NDT

»  Results o f the destructive tests

»  The welding conditions allowed for production welding 

•  If a Third Party Inspector is involved he will be requested to sign theWPQR as a true record of the test 

•  The test coupon is destruct ively tested (tensile, bend, macro tests)

•  The code/application standard/client may require additional tests suchas hardness tests, impact tests or corrosion tests – depending onmaterial and application

Table 1 Typical sequence for welding p rocedure qualification by means of a test weld

Page 80: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 80/302

 

Rev 1 July 2008WPS and Welder Qualifications

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2008 

VARIABLE RANGE for PROCEDURE QUALIFICATION

Welding process No range – process qualified is process that must be used inproduction

PWHT Joints tested after PWHT only qualify as PWHT production joints

Joints tested ‘as-welded’ only qualify ‘as-welded’ production joints

Parent materialtype

Parent materials of similar composition and mechanical propertiesare allocated the same Material Group No.; qualification onlyallows production welding of materials with the same Group No.

Weldingconsumables

Consumables for production welding must have the sameEuropean designation – as a general rule

Materialthickness

 A thickness range is allowed – below and above the test couponthickness

Type of current  AC only qualifies for AC; DC polarity (+VE or -VE) cannot bechanged; pulsed current only qualifies for pulsed currentproduction welding

Preheattemperature

The preheat temperature used for the test is the minimum thatmust be applied

Interpasstemperature

The highest interpass temperature reached in the test is themaximum allowed

Heat input (HI) When impact requirements apply maximum HI allowed is 25%

above test HIwhen hardness requirements apply minimum HI allowed is 25%below test HI

Table 2 Typical examples of WPS essential variables according to European WeldingStandards

Page 81: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 81/302

 

Rev 1 July 2008WPS and Welder Qualifications

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2008 

The welding engineer writes a WPS for welder qualification test piece

•  The welder makes the test weld in accordance with the WPS

•   A welding inspector monitors the welding to ensure that the welder isworking in accordance the WPS 

 An Independent Examiner/Examining Body/Third Party Inspector may be requested to monitor the test

•  The test coupon is subjected to NDT in accordance with the methodsspecified by the Standard (visual inspection, MT or PT and RT or UT)

•  For certain materials, and welding processes, some destructivetesting may be required (bends or macros)

 

•   A Welder’s Qualif ication Certif icate is prepared showing the weldingconditions used for the test piece and the range of qualificationallowed by the Standard for production welding

•  If a Third Party is involved, the Qualification Certificate would beendorsed as a true record of the test 

Table 3 Stages for qualification of a welder

Page 82: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 82/302

 

Rev 1 July 2008WPS and Welder Qualifications

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2008 

VARIABLE RANGE for WELDER QUALIFICATION

Welding process No range – process qualified is process that a welder can use inproduction

Type of weld Butt welds cover any type of joint except branch weldsfillet welds only qualify fillets

Parent materialtype

Parent materials of similar composition and mechanical propertiesare allocated the same Material Group No.; qualification only allowsproduction welding of materials with the same Group No. but theGroups allow much wider composition ranges than the procedureGroups

Filler material Electrodes and filler wires for production welding must be of thesame form as the test (solid wire, flux cored, etc); for MMA coatingtype is essential

Material

thickness

 A thickness range is allowed; for test pieces above 12mm allow

≥ 5mm

Pipe diameter Essential and very restricted for small diameters; test pieces above

25mm allow ≥ 0.5 x diameter used (min. 25mm)

Welding positions Position of welding very important; H-L045 allows all positions(except PG)

Table 4 Typical examples of welder qualification essential variables according toEuropean Welding Standards 

Page 83: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 83/302

 

Rev 1 July 2008WPS and Welder Qualifications

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2008 

Page 84: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 84/302

 

Rev 1 July 2008WPS and Welder Qualifications

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2008 

Page 85: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 85/302

 

Rev 1 July 2008WPS and Welder Qualifications

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2008 

Page 86: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 86/302

 

Rev 1 July 2008WPS and Welder Qualifications

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2008 

Page 87: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 87/302

 

Rev 1 July 2008WPS and Welder Qualifications

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2008 

Page 88: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 88/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Materials Inspection

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010 

1 General

One of the duties of the Visual/Welding Inspector is to carry out materialsinspection. There are a number of situations where the inspector will berequired to carry out materials inspection:

•  At the plate or pipe mill,•  Of material during fabrication or construction

•  Of material after installation, usually during a planned maintenanceprogramme, outage or shutdown.

 A wide range of materials are available, that can be used in fabrication andwelding. These include, but are not limited to:

•  Steels

•  Stainless steels

•  Aluminium and its alloys

•  Nickel and its alloys

•  Copper and its alloys

•  Titanium and its alloys

•  Cast iron

These materials are all widely used in fabrication, welding and constructionto meet the requirements of a diverse range of applications and industrysectors.

There are three essential aspects to materials inspection that the Inspectorshould consider:

•  Material type and weldability•  Material traceability

•  Material condition and dimensions.

2 Material Types and Weldabil ity

 A Welding Inspector must be able to understand and interpret the materialdesignation in order to check compliance with relevant normativedocuments. For example materials standards such as BS EN, API, ASTM,the welding procedure specification (WPS), the purchase order, fabricationdrawings, the quality plan/the contract specification and client requirements.

 A commonly used material standard for steel designation is BS EN 10025 –Hot rolled products of non-alloy structural steels. 

Page 89: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 89/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Materials Inspection

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010 

 A typical steel designation to this standard, S355J2G3, would be classifiedas follows:

S Structural steel

355 Minimum yield strength: N/mm² at t ≤ 16mmJ2 Longitudinal Charpy, 27Joules 6-20°C

G3 Normalised or normalised rolled

In terms of material type and weldability, commonly used materials andmost alloys of these materials can be fusion welded using various weldingprocesses, in a wide range of thickness, and, where applicable, diameters.

Reference to other standards such as ISO 15608 Welding - Guidelines for ametallic material grouping

 

system, steel producers and welding consumabledata books can also provide the Inspector with guidance on the suitability ofa material and consumable type for a given application.

3 Alloying Elements and Their EffectsIron FeCarbon C For strengthManganese Mn For toughnessSilicon Si < 0.3% deoxidiser Aluminium Al Grain refiner, <0.008% deoxidiser + toughnessChromium Cr Corrosion resistanceMolybdenum Mo 1% is for creep resistanceVanadium V StrengthNickel Ni Low temperature applicationsCopper Cu Used for weathering steels (Corten)Sulphur S Residual element (can cause hot shortness)Phosphorus P Residual elementTitanium Ti Grain refiner, used as a micro alloying element (S&T)Niobium Nb Grain refiner, used as a micro alloying element (S&T)(S&T) = strength and toughness

Page 90: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 90/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Materials Inspection

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010 

4 Material Traceabili ty

Traceability is defined as ‘the ability to trace the history, application orlocation of that which is under consideration’. In the case of a weldedproduct, traceability may require the Inspector to consider:

•  Origin of the materials – both parent and filler material•  Processing history – for example before or after PWHT

•  Location of the product – this would usually refer to a specific part or sub-assembly

To trace the history of the material, reference to the inspection documentsmust be made. BS EN 10204 Metallic products – Types of inspectiondocuments  is the standard, which provides guidance on these types ofdocument. Under BS EN 10204 inspection documents fall into two types:

a) Non-specific inspectionInspection carried out by the manufacturer in accordance with his own

procedures to assess whether products defined by the same productspecification and made by the same manufacturing process, are incompliance with the requirements of the order or not.

Type 2.1 are documents in which the manufacturer declares that theproducts supplied are in compliance with the requirements of the order  without inclusion of test results.

Type 2.2 are documents in which the manufacturer declares that theproducts supplied are in compliance with the requirements of the order andin which test results based on non-specific inspection are supplied.

b) Specific inspectionInspection carried out, before delivery, according to the productspecification, on the products to be supplied or on test units of which theproducts supplied are part, in order to verify that these products are incompliance with the requirements of the order.

Type 3.1 are documents in which the manufacturer declares that theproducts supplied are in compliance with the requirements of the order andin which test results are supplied.

Type 3.2 are documents prepared by both the manufacturer’s authorised

inspection representative independent of the manufacturing department,and either the purchaser’s authorised representative or the inspectordesignated by the official regulations, and in which they declare that theproducts supplied are in compliance with the requirements of the orderand in which test results are supplied.

Page 91: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 91/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Materials Inspection

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010 

 Application or location of a particular material can be carried out through areview of the welding procedure specification (WPS), the fabricationdrawings, the quality plan or by physical inspection of the material at thepoint of use.

In certain circumstances the Inspector may have to witness the transfer of

cast numbers from the original plate to pieces to be used in production.

On pipeline work it is a requirement that the inspector records all therelevant information for each piece of line pipe. On large diameter pipes thisinformation is usually stencilled on the inside of the pipe. On smallerdiameter pipes the information may be stencilled along the outside of thepipe.

Page 92: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 92/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Materials Inspection

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010 

BS EN 10204: Metallic materials

Types of inspection documents summary

a) Non-specific inspection may be replaced by specific inspection if specified in thematerial standard or the order.

b) Quality management system of the material manufacturer certified by acompetent body established within the community and having undergone aspecific assessment for materials

a) NON–SPECIFIC INSPECTION *

Inspection document type 2.1Declaration of compliance with the order

Statement of  compliance with the order.Validated by the manufacturer.

Inspection document type 2.2Test report

Statement of compliance with the order,with indication of results of non-specificinspection. Validated by the manufacturer

b) SPECIFIC INSPECTION *

Inspection certificate type 3.1Statement of compliance with theorder, with indication of results ofspecific inspectionValidated by the manufacturer’sauthorised inspection representativeindependent of the manufacturing

department.

Inspection certificate type 3.2Statement of compliance with the order,with indication of results of specificinspection.Validated by the manufacturer’s authorisedinspection representative independent ofthe manufacturing department and either

the purchaser’s authorised inspectionrepresentative or the inspector designatedby the official regulations.

Page 93: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 93/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Materials Inspection

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010 

5 Material Condition and Dimensions  

The condition of the material could have an adverse effect on the service lifeof the component; it is therefore an important inspection point. The points forinspection must include:

General inspection, visible imperfections, dimensions and surface condition.

General inspectionThis type of inspection takes account of storage conditions, methods ofhandling, the number of plates or pipes and distortion tolerances.

Visible imperfectionsTypical visible imperfections are usually attributable to the manufacturingprocess and would include cold laps, which break the surface or laminationsif they appear at the edge of the plate. For laminations, which may bepresent in the body of the material, ultrasonic testing using a compressionprobe may be required.

Cold lap Plate lamination

Dimensions For plates this would include length, width and thickness.

For pipes, this would not only include length and wall thickness, but alsoinspection of diameter and ovality. At this stage of the inspection thematerial cast or heat number may also be recorded for validation against thematerial certificate.

Surface conditionThe surface condition of the material is important, it must not showexcessive mill scale and rust, must not be badly pitted, or haveunacceptable mechanical damage.

Page 94: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 94/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Materials Inspection

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010 

There are four grades of rusting which the inspector may have to consider:

Rust Grade A Steel surface largely covered with adherent mill scale withlittle or no rust

Rust Grade B  Steel surface, which has begun to rust , and from which mi llscale has begun to f lake.

Rust Grade C  Steel surface on which the mill scale has rusted away or fromwhich i t can be scraped. Slight pitt ing visible under normalvision.

Rust Grade D  Steel surface on which mill scale has rusted away. Generalpitting visible under normal vision.

Page 95: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 95/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Materials Inspection

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010 

6 Summary

Material inspection is an important part of the Inspector’s duties and anunderstanding of the documentation involved is the key to success.

Material inspection must be approached in a logical and precise manner if

material verification and traceability are to be achieved. This can be difficultif the material is not readily accessible, access may have to be provided,safety precautions observed and authorisation obtained before materialinspection can be carried out. Reference to the quality plan should identifythe level of inspection required and the point at which inspection takesplace. Reference to a fabrication drawing should provide information on thetype and location of the material.

If material type cannot be determined from the inspection documentsavailable, or if the inspection document is missing, other methods ofidentifying the material may need to be used.

These methods may include but are not limited to: spark test, spectroscopicanalysis, chemical analysis, scleroscope hardness test etc. These types oftests are normally conducted by an approved test house, but sometimes onsite, and the Inspector may be required to witness these tests in order toverify compliance with the purchase order or appropriate standard(s).

*EN ISO 9000 Quality management systems – Fundamentals and vocabulary

Page 96: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 96/302

 Rev 1 January 2010Residual Stress and Distortion

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010 

1 What Causes Distort ion?

Because welding involves highly localised heating of joint edges to fuse thematerial, non-uniform stresses are set up in the component because ofexpansion and contraction of the heated material.

Initially, compressive stresses are created in the surrounding cold parentmetal when the weld pool is formed due to the thermal expansion of the hotmetal (heat affected zone (HAZ)) adjacent to the weld pool. However,tensile stresses occur on cooling when the contraction of the weld metal andimmediate HAZ is resisted by the bulk of the cold parent metal.

The magnitude of thermal stresses induced into the material can be seen bythe volume change in the weld area on solidification and subsequent coolingto room temperature. For example, when welding C-Mn steel, the moltenweld metal volume will be reduced by approximately 3% on solidificationand the volume of the solidified weld metal/HAZ will be reduced by a further7% as its temperature falls from the melting point of steel to room temperature.

If the stresses generated from thermal expansion/contraction exceed theyield strength of the parent metal, localised plastic deformation of the metaloccurs. Plastic deformation causes a permanent reduction in the componentdimensions and distorts the structure.

2 What Are the Main Types of Distort ion?

Distortion occurs in several ways:

•  Longitudinal shrinkage

•  Transverse shrinkage

•  Angular distortion•  Bowing and dishing

•  Buckling

Contraction of the weld area on cooling results in both transverse  andlongitudinal shrinkage.

Non-uniform contraction (through thickness) produces angular  distortion aswell as longitudinal and transverse shrinking.

For example, in a single V butt weld, the first weld run produces longitudinaland transverse shrinkage and rotation. The second run causes the plates torotate using the first weld deposit as a fulcrum. Therefore balanced weldingin a double side V butt joint can be used to produce uniform contraction andprevent angular distortion.

Page 97: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 97/302

 Rev 1 January 2010Residual Stress and Distortion

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010 

Similarly, in a single-sided fillet weld, non-uniform contraction will produceangular distortion of the upstanding leg. Double-sided fillet welds cantherefore be used to control distortion in the upstanding fillet but becausethe weld is only deposited on one side of the base plate, angular distortionwill now be produced in the plate.

Longitudinal bowing  in welded plates happens when the weld centre is notcoincident with the neutral axis of the section so that longitudinal shrinkagein the welds bends the section into a curved shape. Clad plate tends to bowin two directions due to longitudinal and transverse shrinkage of thecladding. This produces a dished shape.

Dishing  is also produced in stiffened plating. Plates usually dish inwardsbetween the stiffeners, because of angular distortion at the stiffenerattachment welds.

In plating, long range compressive stresses can cause elastic buckling inthin plates, resulting in dishing, bowing or rippling, see below.

Examples of distortion

Examples of distortion.

Increasing the leg length of fillet welds, in particular, increases shrinkage.

Page 98: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 98/302

 Rev 1 January 2010Residual Stress and Distortion

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010 

3 What Are the Factors Affecting Distort ion?

If a metal is uniformly heated and cooled there would be almost nodistortion. However, because the material is locally heated and restrained bythe surrounding cold metal, stresses are generated higher than the materialyield stress causing permanent distortion. The principal factors affecting the

type and degree of distortion are:

•  Parent material properties

•  Amount of restraint

•  Joint design

•  Part fit-up

•  Welding procedure

3.1 Parent material propert ies

Parent material properties, which influence distortion, are coefficient ofthermal expansion, thermal conductivity, and to a lesser extent, yield stress

and Young’s modulus. As distortion is determined by expansion andcontraction of the material, the coefficient of thermal expansion of thematerial plays a significant role in determining the stresses generated duringwelding and, hence, the degree of distortion. For example, as stainless steelhas a higher coefficient of expansion and lesser thermal conductivity thanplain carbon steel, it generally has significantly more distortion.

3.2 Restraint

If a component is welded without any external restraint, it distorts to relievethe welding stresses. So, methods of restraint, such as strongbacks in buttwelds, can prevent movement and reduce distortion. As restraint produces

higher levels of residual stress in the material, there is a greater risk ofcracking in weld metal and HAZ especially in crack-sensitive materials.

3.3 Joint design

Both butt and fillet joints are prone to distortion, but it can be minimised inbutt joints by adopting a joint type, which balances the thermal stressesthrough the plate thickness. For example, double- in preference to a single-sided weld. Double-sided fillet welds should eliminate angular distortion ofthe upstanding member, especially if the two welds are deposited at thesame time.

3.4 Part fit -upFit-up should be uniform to produce predictable and consistent shrinkage.Excessive joint gap can also increase the degree of distortion by increasingthe amount of weld metal needed to fill the joint. The joints should beadequately tacked to prevent relative movement between the parts duringwelding.

Page 99: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 99/302

 Rev 1 January 2010Residual Stress and Distortion

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010 

3.5 Welding procedure

This influences the degree of distortion mainly through its effect on the heatinput. As welding procedures are usually selected for reasons of quality andproductivity, the welder has limited scope for reducing distortion. As ageneral rule, weld volume should be kept to a minimum. Also, the welding

sequence and technique should aim to balance the thermally inducedstresses around the neutral axis of the component.

4 Distort ion - Prevention By Pre-Setting, Pre-Bendingor Use of Restraint

Distortion can often be prevented at the design stage, for example, byplacing the welds about the neutral axis, reducing the amount of weldingand depositing the weld metal using a balanced welding technique. Indesigns where this is not possible, distortion may be prevented by one ofthe following methods:

•  Pre-setting of parts•  Pre-bending of parts

•  Use of restraint

The technique chosen will be influenced by the size and complexity of thecomponent or assembly, the cost of any restraining equipment and the needto limit residual stresses.

Pre-setting of parts to produce correct alignment after welding  

a) Pre-setting of fillet joint to prevent angular distortionb) Pre-setting of butt joint to prevent angular distortion

4.1 Pre-setting of parts

The parts are pre-set and left free to move during welding (see above). In

practice, the parts are pre-set by a pre-determined amount so that distortionoccurring during welding is used to achieve overall alignment anddimensional control.

The main advantages compared with the use of restraint are that there is noexpensive equipment needed and there will be lower residual stress in thestructure.

Page 100: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 100/302

 Rev 1 January 2010Residual Stress and Distortion

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010 

Unfortunately, as it is difficult to predict the amount of pre-setting needed toaccommodate shrinkage, a number of trial welds will be required. Forexample, when MMA or MIG/MAG welding butt joints, the joint gap willnormally close ahead of welding; when submerged arc welding; the jointmay open up during welding. When carrying out trial welds, it is alsoessential that the test structure is reasonably representative of the full size

structure in order to generate the level of distortion likely to occur in practice.For these reasons, pre-setting is a technique more suitable for simplecomponents or assemblies.

Pre-bending, using strongbacks and wedges, toaccommodate angular distortion in thin plates. 

4.2 Pre-bending of parts

Pre-bending, or pre-springing the parts before welding is used to pre-stressthe assembly to counteract shrinkage during welding. As shown above, pre-bending by means of strongbacks and wedges can be used to pre-set aseam before welding to compensate for angular distortion. Releasing thewedges after welding will allow the parts to move back into alignment.

The figure shows the diagonal bracings and centre jack used to pre-bend

the fixture, not the component. This counteracts the distortion introducedthough out-of-balance welding.

4.3 Use of restraint

Because of the difficulty in applying pre-setting and pre-bending, restraint isthe more widely practised technique. The basic principle is that the parts areplaced in position and held under restraint to minimise any movement duringwelding. When removing the component from the restraining equipment, arelatively small amount of movement will occur due to locked-in stresses.This can be cured by either applying a small amount of pre-set or stress-relieving before removing the restraint.

When welding assemblies, all the component parts should be held in thecorrect position until completion of welding and a suitably balancedfabrication sequence used to minimise distortion.

Welding with restraint will generate additional residual stresses in the weld,which may cause cracking. When welding susceptible materials, a suitablewelding sequence and the use of preheating will reduce this risk.

Page 101: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 101/302

 Rev 1 January 2010Residual Stress and Distortion

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010 

Restraint is relatively simple to apply using clamps, jigs and fixtures to holdthe parts during welding.

4.3.1 Welding jigs and fixtures

Jigs and fixtures are used to locate the parts and ensure that dimensionalaccuracy is maintained whilst welding. They can be of a relatively simpleconstruction, as shown in a) below but the welding engineer will need toensure that the finished fabrication can be removed easily after welding.

4.3.2 Flexible clamps

 A flexible clamp (b) below) can be effective in applying restraint and alsosetting-up and maintaining the joint gap (it can also be used to close a gapthat is too wide).

 A disadvantage is that as the restraining forces in the clamp will betransferred into the joint when the clamps are removed, the level of residualstress across the joint can be quite high.

a) Welding jig b) Flexible clamps

c) Strongbacks with wedges 

d) Fully welded strongbacks

Restraint techniques to prevent distortion.

4.3.3 Strongbacks (and wedges)

Strongbacks are a popular means of applying restraint especially for sitework. Wedged strongbacks (c)) above),  will prevent angular distortion inplate and help prevent peaking in welding cylindrical shells. As these typesof strongback will allow transverse shrinkage, the risk of cracking will begreatly reduced compared with fully welded strongbacks.

Page 102: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 102/302

 Rev 1 January 2010Residual Stress and Distortion

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010 

Fully welded strongbacks (welded on both sides of the joint) (d) above) willminimise both angular distortion and transverse shrinkage. As significantstresses can be generated across the weld, which will increase anytendency for cracking, care should be taken in the use of this type ofstrongback.

4.4 Best pract ice Adopting the following assembly techniques will help to control distortion:

•  Pre-set parts so that welding distortion will achieve overall alignment anddimensional control with the minimum of residual stress.

•  Pre-bend joint edges to counteract distortion and achieve alignment anddimensional control with minimum residual stress.

•  Apply restraint during welding by using jigs and fixtures, flexible clamps,strongbacks and tack welding but consider the risk of cracking which canbe quite significant, especially for fully welded strongbacks.

•  Use an approved procedure for welding and removal of welds for restraint

techniques, which may need preheat to avoid forming imperfections in thecomponent surface.

5 Distort ion - Prevention by Design

Design principles

 At the design stage, welding distortion can often be prevented, or at leastrestricted, by considering:

•  Elimination of welding

•  Weld placement

•  Reducing the volume of weld metal•  Reducing the number of runs

•  Use of balanced welding

5.1 Elimination of welding

 As distortion and shrinkage are an inevitable result of welding, good designrequires that not only the amount of welding is kept to a minimum, but alsothe smallest amount of weld metal is deposited. Welding can often beeliminated at the design stage by forming the plate or using a standardrolled section, as shown below.

Page 103: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 103/302

 Rev 1 January 2010Residual Stress and Distortion

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010 

Elimination of welds by:a) Forming the plate;b) Use of rolled or extruded section.

If possible, the design should use intermittent welds rather than a continuousrun, to reduce the amount of welding. For example, in attaching stiffeningplates, a substantial reduction in the amount of welding can often be

achieved whilst maintaining adequate strength.

5.2 Weld placement

Placing and balancing of welds are important in designing for minimumdistortion. The closer a weld is positioned to the neutral axis of a fabrication,the lower the leverage effect of the shrinkage forces and the final distortion.Examples of poor and good designs are shown below.

Distortion may be reduced by placing the weldsaround the neutral axis.

 As most welds are deposited away from the neutral axis, distortion can be

minimised by designing the fabrication so the shrinkage forces of anindividual weld are balanced by placing another weld on the opposite side ofthe neutral axis. When possible, welding should be carried out alternately onopposite sides, instead of completing one side first. In large structures, ifdistortion is occurring preferentially on one side, it may be possible to takecorrective actions, for example, by increasing welding on the other side tocontrol the overall distortion.

Page 104: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 104/302

 Rev 1 January 2010Residual Stress and Distortion

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010 

5.3 Reducing the volume of weld metal

To minimise distortion, as well as for economic reasons, the volume of weldmetal should be limited to the design requirements. For a single-sided joint,the cross-section of the weld should be kept as small as possible to reducethe level of angular distortion, as illustrated below.

Reducing the amount of angular distortion and lateral shrinkage.

Ways of reducing angular distortion and lateral shrinkage:

•  Reducing the volume of weld metal;

•  Using single pass weld

•  Ensure fillet welds are not oversize.

Joint preparation angle and root gap should be minimised providing the weldcan be made satisfactorily. To facilitate access, it may be possible to specifya larger root gap and smaller preparation angle. By cutting down thedifference in the amount of weld metal at the root and face of the weld, thedegree of angular distortion will be correspondingly reduced. Butt joints

made in a single pass using deep penetration have little angular distortion,especially if a closed butt joint can be welded (see above). For example, thinsection material can be welded using plasma and laser welding processesand thick section can be welded, in the vertical position, using electrogasand electroslag processes. Although angular distortion can be eliminated,there will still be longitudinal and transverse shrinkage.

In thick section material, as the cross-sectional area of a double V jointpreparation is often only half that of a single V preparation, the volume ofweld metal to be deposited can be substantially reduced. The double V jointpreparation also permits balanced welding about the middle of the joint toeliminate angular distortion.

 As weld shrinkage is proportional to the amount of weld metal both poor joint fit-up and over-welding will increase the amount of distortion. Angulardistortion in fillet welds is particularly affected by over-welding. As designstrength is based on throat thickness, over-welding to produce a convexweld bead does not increase the allowable design strength but will increasethe shrinkage and distortion.

Page 105: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 105/302

 Rev 1 January 2010Residual Stress and Distortion

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010 

5.4 Reducing the number of runs

There are conflicting opinions on whether it is better to deposit a givenvolume of weld metal using a small number of large weld passes or a largenumber of small passes. Experience shows that for a single-sided butt joint,or fillet weld, a large single weld deposit gives less angular distortion than if

the weld is made with a number of small runs. Generally, in an unrestrained joint, the degree of angular distortion is approximately proportional to thenumber of passes.

Completing the joint with a small number of large weld deposits results inmore longitudinal and transverse shrinkage than a weld completed in alarger number of small passes. In a multi-pass weld, previously depositedweld metal provides restraint, so the angular distortion per pass decreasesas the weld is built up. Large deposits also increase the risk of elasticbuckling particularly in thin section plate.

5.5 Use of balanced welding

Balanced welding is an effective means of controlling angular distortion in amulti-pass butt weld by arranging the welding sequence to ensure thatangular distortion is continually being corrected and not allowed toaccumulate during welding. Comparative amounts of angular distortion frombalanced welding and welding one side of the joint first are shown below.The balanced welding technique can also be applied to fillet joints.

Balanced welding to reduce the amount of angular distortion.

If welding alternately on either side of the joint is not possible, or if one sidehas to be completed first, an asymmetrical joint preparation may be usedwith more weld metal being deposited on the second side. The greatercontraction resulting from depositing the weld metal on the second side willhelp counteract the distortion on the first side.

Page 106: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 106/302

 Rev 1 January 2010Residual Stress and Distortion

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010 

5.6 Best pract ice

The following design principles can control distortion:

•  Eliminate welding by forming the plate and using rolled or extrudedsections

•  Minimise the amount of weld metal•  Do not over-weld

•  Use intermittent welding in preference to a continuous weld pass

•  Place welds about the neutral axis

•  Balance the welding about the middle of the joint by using a double V joint in preference to a single

 Adopting best practice principles can have surprising cost benefits. Forexample, for a design fillet leg length of 6mm, depositing an 8mm leg lengthwill result in the deposition of 57% additional weld metal. Besides the extracost of depositing weld metal and the increase risk of distortion, it is costly toremove this extra weld metal later. However, designing for distortion control

may incur additional fabrication costs. For example, the use of a double V joint preparation is an excellent way to reduce weld volume and controldistortion, but extra costs may be incurred in production throughmanipulation of the workpiece for the welder to access the reverse side.

6 Distort ion - Prevention by Fabrication Techniques

6.1 Assembly techniques

In general, the welder has little influence on the choice of welding procedurebut assembly techniques can often be crucial in minimising distortion. Theprincipal assembly techniques are:

•  Tack welding

•  Back-to-back assembly

•  Stiffening

6.1.1 Tack welding

Tack welds are ideal for setting and maintaining the joint gap but can alsobe used to resist transverse shrinkage. To be effective, thought should begiven to the number of tack welds, their length and the distance betweenthem. With too few, there is the risk of the joint progressively closing up aswelding proceeds. In a long seam, using MMA or MIG/MAG, the joint edges

may even overlap. It should be noted that when using the submerged arcprocess, the joint might open up if not adequately tacked.

Page 107: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 107/302

 Rev 1 January 2010Residual Stress and Distortion

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010 

The tack welding sequence is important to maintain a uniform root gapalong the length of the joint. Three alternative tack-welding sequences areshown below:

•  Tack weld straight through to the end of the joint a). It is necessary toclamp the plates or to use wedges to maintain the joint gap during tacking.

•  Tack weld one end and then use a back stepping technique for tackingthe rest of the joint b).

•  Tack weld the centre and complete the tack welding by back stepping c).

 Alternative procedures used for tack weldingto prevent transverse shrinkage.

Directional tacking is a useful technique for controlling the joint gap, forexample closing a joint gap which is (or has become) too wide.

When tack welding, it is important that tacks which are to be fused into the

main weld, are produced to an approved procedure using appropriatelyqualified welders. The procedure may require preheat and an approvedconsumable as specified for the main weld. Removal of the tacks alsoneeds careful control to avoid causing defects in the component surface.

6.1.2 Back-to-back assembly

By tack welding or clamping two identical components back-to-back,welding of both components can be balanced around the neutral axis of thecombined assembly (see a) on next page). It is recommended that theassembly is stress-relieved before separating the components. If stress-relieving is not done, it may be necessary to insert wedges between the

components (b) on next page) so when the wedges are removed, the partswill move back to the correct shape or alignment.

Page 108: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 108/302

 Rev 1 January 2010Residual Stress and Distortion

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010 

Back-to-back assembly to control distortion when welding two identicalcomponents:a) Assemblies tacked together before welding;b) Use of wedges for components that distort on separation after welding. 

6.1.3 Stiffening

Longitudinal stiffeners prevent bowingin butt welded thin plate joints.

Longitudinal shrinkage in butt welded seams often results in bowing,especially when fabricating thin plate structures. Longitudinal stiffeners inthe form of flats or angles, welded along each side of the seam (see above)are effective in preventing longitudinal bowing. Stiffener location isimportant: they must be at a sufficient distance from the joint so they do notinterfere with welding, unless located on the reverse side of a joint weldedfrom one side.

6.2 Welding procedure 

 A suitable welding procedure is usually determined by productivity andquality requirements rather than the need to control distortion. Nevertheless,the welding process, technique and sequence do influence the distortionlevel.

Page 109: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 109/302

 Rev 1 January 2010Residual Stress and Distortion

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010 

Welding process

General rules for selecting a welding process to prevent angular distortionare:

•  Deposit the weld metal as quickly as possible

•  Use the least number of runs to fill the joint

Unfortunately, selecting a suitable welding process based on these rulesmay increase longitudinal shrinkage resulting in bowing and buckling.

In manual welding, MIG/MAG, a high deposition rate process, is preferred toMMA. Weld metal should be deposited using the largest diameter electrode(MMA), or the highest current level (MIG/MAG), without causing lack-of-fusion imperfections. As heating is much slower and more diffuse, gaswelding normally produces more angular distortion than the arc processes.

Mechanised techniques combining high deposition rates and welding

speeds have the greatest potential for preventing distortion. As the distortionis more consistent, simple techniques such as pre-setting are more effectivein controlling angular distortion.

Welding technique

General rules for preventing distortion are:

•  Keep the weld (fillet) to the minimum specified size

•  Use balanced welding about the neutral axis

•  Keep the time between runs to a minimum

 Angular distortion of the joint as determinedby the number of runs in the fillet weld.

Page 110: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 110/302

 Rev 1 January 2010Residual Stress and Distortion

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010 

In the absence of restraint, angular distortion in both fillet and butt joints willbe a function of the joint geometry, weld size and the number of runs for agiven cross-section. Angular distortion (measured in degrees) as a functionof the number of runs for a 10mm leg length fillet weld is shown above.

If possible, balanced welding around the neutral axis should be done, for

example on double-sided fillet joints, by two people welding simultaneously.In butt joints, the run order may be crucial in that balanced welding can beused to correct angular distortion as it develops.

Use of welding direction to control distortion:

a) Back-step welding;b) Skip welding.

Welding sequence

The welding sequence, or direction, of welding is important and should betowards the free end of the joint. For long welds, the whole of the weld is not

completed in one direction. Short runs, for example using the back-step orskip welding technique, are very effective in distortion control (see above)

•  Back-step welding involves depositing short adjacent weld lengths in theopposite direction to the general progression (see above).

•  Skip welding is laying short weld lengths in a pre-determined, evenlyspaced, sequence along the seam (b) in above figure). Weld lengths andthe spaces between them are generally equal to the natural run-outlength of one electrode. The direction of deposit for each electrode is thesame, but it is not necessary for the welding direction to be opposite tothe direction of general progression.

6.3 Best pract iceThe following fabrication techniques are used to control distortion:

•  Using tack welds to set-up and maintain the joint gap

•  Identical components welded back-to-back so welding can be balancedabout the neutral axis

Page 111: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 111/302

 Rev 1 January 2010Residual Stress and Distortion

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010 

•  Attachment of longitudinal stiffeners to prevent longitudinal bowing in buttwelds of thin plate structures

•  Where there is choice of welding procedure, process and techniqueshould aim to deposit the weld metal as quickly as possible; MIG/MAG inpreference to MMA or gas welding and mechanised rather than manualwelding

•  In long runs, the whole weld should not be completed in one direction;back-step or skip welding techniques should be used.

Page 112: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 112/302

 Rev 1 January 2010Residual Stress and Distortion

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010 

7 Distort ion - Corrective Techniques

Every effort should be made to avoid distortion at the design stage and byusing suitable fabrication procedures. As it is not always possible to avoiddistortion during fabrication, several well-established corrective techniquescan be employed. Reworking to correct distortion should not be undertaken

lightly as it is costly and needs considerable skill to avoid damaging thecomponent.

General guidelines are provided on best practice for correcting distortionusing mechanical or thermal techniques.

7.1 Mechanical techniques

The principal mechanical techniques are hammering and pressing.Hammering may cause surface damage and work hardening.

In cases of bowing or angular distortion, the complete component can often

be straightened on a press without the disadvantages of hammering.Packing pieces are inserted between the component and the platens of thepress. It is important to impose sufficient deformation to give over-correctionso that the normal elastic spring-back will allow the component to assumeits correct shape.

Use of press to correct bowing in T butt joint.

Pressing to correct bowing in a flanged plate is shown above. In longcomponents, distortion is removed progressively in a series of incrementalpressings; each one acting over a short length. In the case of the flanged

plate, the load should act on the flange to prevent local damage to the webat the load points. As incremental point loading will only produce anapproximately straight component, it is better to use a former to achieve astraight component or to produce a smooth curvature.

Page 113: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 113/302

 Rev 1 January 2010Residual Stress and Distortion

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010 

7.1.1 Best practice for mechanical straightening

The following should be adopted when using pressing techniques to removedistortion:

•  Use packing pieces which will over correct the distortion so that spring-back will return the component to the correct shape.

•  Check that the component is adequately supported during pressing toprevent buckling.

•  Use a former (or rolling) to achieve a straight component or produce acurvature.

•  As unsecured packing pieces may fly out from the press, the followingsafe practice must be adopted:- Bolt the packing pieces to the platen- Place a metal plate of adequate thickness to intercept the missile- Clear personnel from the hazard area

7.2 Thermal techniques

The basic principle behind thermal techniques is to create sufficiently highlocal stresses so that, on cooling, the component is pulled back into shape.

Localised heating to correct distortion.

This is achieved by locally heating the material to a temperature whereplastic deformation will occur as the hot, low yield strength material tries toexpand against the surrounding cold, higher yield strength metal. On coolingto room temperature the heated area will attempt to shrink to a smaller sizethan before heating. The stresses generated thereby will pull the componentinto the required shape (see above).

Local heating is, therefore, a relatively simple but effective means ofcorrecting welding distortion. Shrinkage level is determined by size, number,location and temperature of the heated zones. Thickness and plate size

determines the area of the heated zone. Number and placement of heatingzones are largely a question of experience. For new jobs, tests will often beneeded to quantify the level of shrinkage.

Spot, line, or wedge-shaped heating techniques can all be used in thermalcorrection of distortion.

Page 114: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 114/302

 Rev 1 January 2010Residual Stress and Distortion

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010 

7.2.1 Spot heating

Spot heating for correcting buckling.

Spot heating is used to remove buckling, for example when a relatively thinsheet has been welded to a stiff frame. Distortion is corrected by spot

heating on the convex side. If the buckling is regular, the spots can bearranged symmetrically, starting at the centre of the buckle and workingoutwards.

7.2.2 Line heating

Line heating to correct angular distortion in a fillet weld.

Heating in straight lines is often used to correct angular distortion, forexample, in fillet welds. The component is heated along the line of thewelded joint but on the opposite side to the weld so the induced stresses willpull the flange flat.

7.2.3 Wedge-shaped heating

To correct distortion in larger complex fabrications it may be necessary toheat whole areas in addition to employing line heating. The pattern aims atshrinking one part of the fabrication to pull the material back into shape.

Page 115: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 115/302

 Rev 1 January 2010Residual Stress and Distortion

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010 

Use of wedge shaped heating to straighten plate.

 Apart from spot heating of thin panels, a wedge-shaped heating zone should

be used from base to apex and the temperature profile should be uniformthrough the plate thickness. For thicker section material, it may benecessary to use two torches, one on each side of the plate.

 As a general guideline, to straighten a curved plate wedge dimensionsshould be:

•  Length of wedge - two-thirds of the plate width.

•  Width of wedge (base) - one sixth of its length (base to apex).

The degree of straightening will typically be 5mm in a 3m length of plate.Wedge-shaped heating can be used to correct distortion in a variety of

situations, (see below):

•  Standard rolled section, which needs correction in two planes a)

•  Buckle at edge of plate as an alternative to rolling b)

•  Box section fabrication, which is distorted out of plane c)

a) Standard rolled steelsection 

b) Buckled edge of plate c) Box fabrication 

Wedge shaped heating to correct distortion.

Page 116: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 116/302

 Rev 1 January 2010Residual Stress and Distortion

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010 

7.2.4 General precautions

The dangers of using thermal straightening techniques are the risk of over-shrinking too large an area or causing metallurgical changes by heating totoo high a temperature. As a general rule, when correcting distortion insteels the temperature of the area should be restricted to approximately to600-650°C - dull red heat.

If the heating is interrupted, or the heat lost, the operator must allow themetal to cool and then begin again.

7.2.5 Best practice for distor tion correction by thermal heating

The following should be adopted when using thermal techniques to removedistortion:

•  Use spot heating to remove buckling in thin sheet structures.

•  Other than in spot heating of thin panels, use a wedge-shaped heatingtechnique.

•  Use line heating to correct angular distortion in plate.•  Restrict the area of heating to avoid over-shrinking the component.

•  Limit the temperature to 600-650°C (dull red heat) in steels to preventmetallurgical damage.

•  In wedge heating, heat from the base to the apex of the wedge, penetrateevenly through the plate thickness and maintain an even temperature.

Page 117: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 117/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Weldability of Steels

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010 

1 Introduction

The term weldability simply means the ability to be welded and many typesof steel that are weldable have been developed for a wide range ofapplications.

However, it is the ease or difficulty of making a weld with suitable propertiesand free from defects which determines whether steels are considered ashaving ‘good weldability’ or said to have poor weldability. A steel is usuallysaid to have poor weldability if it is necessary take special precautions toavoid a particular type of imperfection. Another reason may be the need toweld within a very narrow range of parameters to achieve propertiesrequired for the joint.

2 Factors That Affect Weldability  

 A number of inter-related factors determine whether a steel is said to havegood or poor weldability. These are:

•   Actual chemical composition

•  Weld joint configuration

•  Welding process to be used

•  Properties required from the weldment

For steels with poor weldability it is particularly necessary to ensure that:

•  Welding procedure specifications give welding conditions that do notcause cracking but achieve the specified properties

•  Welders work strictly in accordance with the specified welding conditions

•  Welding inspectors regularly monitor welders to ensure they are workingstrictly in accordance the WPSs

Having a good understanding of the characteristics, causes, and ways ofavoiding imperfections in steel weldments should enable welding inspectorsto focus attention on the most influential welding parameters when steelswith poor weldability are being used. 

3 Hydrogen Cracking

During fabrication by welding, cracks can occur in some types of steel, dueto the presence of hydrogen. The technical name for this type of cracking ishydrogen induced cold cracking (HICC) but it is often referred to by othernames that describe various characteristics of hydrogen cracks:

•  Cold cracking - cracks occur when the weld has cooled down

•  HAZ cracking - cracks tend to occur mainly in the HAZ

•  Delayed cracking - cracks may occur some time after welding hasfinished (possibly up to ~48h)

•  Underbead cracking - cracks occur in the HAZ beneath a weld bead

Page 118: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 118/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Weldability of Steels

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010 

 Although most hydrogen cracks occur in the HAZ, there are circumstanceswhen they may form in weld metal.

Figure 1 shows typical locations of HAZ hydrogen cracks.

Figure 2 shows hydrogen crack in the HAZ of a fillet weld.

3.1 Factors influencing susceptibility to hydrogen cracking

Hydrogen cracking in the HAZ of a steel occurs when 4 conditions exist atthe same time:

Hydrogen level > 15ml/100g of weld metal depositedStress > 0.5 of the yield stressTemperature < 3000CSusceptible microstruc ture > 400HV hardness

These four conditions (four factors) are mutually interdependent so that theinfluence of one condition (its’ active level) depends on how active theothers three factors are.

3.2 Cracking mechanism

Hydrogen (H) can enter the molten weld metal when hydrogen containingmolecules are broken down into H atoms in the welding arc.

Because H atoms are very small they can move about (diffuse) in solid steeland while weld metal is hot they can diffuse to the weld surface and escapeinto the atmosphere.

However, at lower temperatures H cannot diffuse as quickly and if theweldment cools down quickly to ambient temperature H will become trapped- usually the HAZ.

If the HAZ has a susceptible microstructure – indicated by being relativelyhard and brittle, there are also relatively high tensile stresses in theweldment then H cracking can occur.

Page 119: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 119/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Weldability of Steels

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010 

The precise mechanism that causes cracks to form is complex but H isbelieved to cause embrittlement of regions of the HAZ so that high-localisedstresses cause cracking rather than plastic straining.

3.3 Avoid ing HAZ hydrogen cracking

Because the factors that cause cracking are interdependent, and each needto be at an active level at the same time, cracking can be avoided byensuring that at least one of the four factors is not active during welding.

Methods that can be used to minimise the influence of each of the fourfactors are considered in the following sub-sections.

Hydrogen

The principal source of hydrogen is moisture (H2O) and the principal sourceof moisture is welding flux. Some fluxes contain cellulose and this can be avery active source of hydrogen.

Welding processes that do not require flux can be regarded as low hydrogenprocesses.

Other sources of hydrogen are moisture present in rust or scale, and oilsand greases (hydrocarbons).

Reducing the influence of hydrogen is possible by:

•  Ensuring that fluxes (coated electrodes, flux-cored wires and SAWfluxes) are low in H when welding commences

•  Low H electrodes must be either baked & then stored in a hot holding

oven or supplied in vacuum-sealed packages;•  Basic agglomerated SAW fluxes should be kept in a heated silo beforeissue to maintain their as-supplied, low moisture, condition

•  Check the diffusible hydrogen content of the weld metal (sometimes it isspecified on the test certificate)

•  Ensuring that a low H condition is maintained throughout welding by notallowing fluxes to pick-up moisture from the atmosphere

•  Low hydrogen electrodes must be issued in small quantities and theexposure time limited; heated ‘quivers’ facilitate this control;

•  Flux-cored wire spools that are not seamless  should be covered orreturned to a suitable storage condition when not in use;

•  Basic agglomerated SAW fluxes should be returned to the heated silo

when welding is not continuous•  Check the amount of moisture present in the shielding gas by checking

the dew point (must be bellow -60°C)

•  Ensuring that the weld zone is dry and free from rust/scale andoil/grease

Page 120: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 120/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Weldability of Steels

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010 

Tensile s tress

There are always tensile stresses acting on a weld because there arealways residual stresses from welding.

The magnitude of the tensile stresses is mainly dependent on the thicknessof the steel at the joint, heat input, joint type, and size and weight of thecomponents being welded.

Tensile stresses in highly restrained joints may be as high as the yieldstrength of the steel and this is usually the case in large components withthick joints and it is not a factor that can easily be controlled.

The only practical ways of reducing the influence of residual stresses maybe by:

•  Avoiding stress concentrations due to poor fit-up

•  Avoiding poor weld profile (sharp weld toes)

•  Applying a stress-relief heat treatment after welding•  Increasing the travel speed as practicable in order to reduce the heat

input

•  Keeping weld metal volume to an as low level as possible

These measures are particularly important when welding some low alloysteels that have particularly sensitivity to hydrogen cracking.

Susceptible HAZ microstructure

 A susceptible HAZ microstructure is one that contains a relatively highproportion of hard brittle phases of steel - particularly martensite. 

The HAZ hardness is a good indicator of susceptibility and when it exceedsa certain value a particular steel is considered to be susceptible. For C andC-Mn steels this hardness value is ~ 350HV and susceptibility to H crackingincreases as hardness increases above this value.

The maximum hardness of an HAZ is influenced by:

•  Chemical composition of the steel

•  Cooling rate of the HAZ after each weld run is made.

For C and C-Mn steels a formula has been developed to assess how the

chemical composition will influence the tendency for significant HAZhardening - the carbon equivalent value (CEV) formula.

The CEV formula most widely used (and adopted by IIW) is:

CEViiw  = % C + %Mn + %Cr + %Mo + %V + %Ni + %Cu6 5 15

Page 121: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 121/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Weldability of Steels

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010 

The CEV of a steel is calculated by inserting the material test certificatevalues shown for chemical composition into the formula. The higher theCEV of a steel the greater its susceptibility to HAZ hardening and thereforethe greater the susceptibility to H cracking.

The element with most influence on HAZ hardness is carbon. The faster the

rate of HAZ cooling after each weld run, the greater the tendency forhardening.

Cooling rate tends to increase as:

•  Heat input decreases (lower energy input)

•  Joint thickness increases (bigger heat sink)

 Avoiding a susceptible HAZ microstructure (for C and C-Mn steels) requires:

•  Procuring steel with a CEV that is at the low-end of the range for the steelgrade(limited scope of effectiveness) 

•  Using moderate welding heat input so that the weld does not cool quickly(and give HAZ hardening)

•  Applying pre-heat so that the HAZ cools more slowly (and does not showsignificant HAZ hardening); in multi-run welds, maintain a specificinterpass temperature

For low alloy steels, with additions of elements such as Cr, Mo and V, theCEV formula is not applicable and so must not be used to judge thesusceptibility to hardening. The HAZ of these steels will always tend to berelatively hard regardless of heat input and pre-heat and so this is a ‘factor’that cannot be effectively controlled to reduce the risk of H cracking. This isthe reason why some of the low alloy steels have greater tendency to showhydrogen cracking than in weldable C and C-Mn steels, which enable HAZhardness to be controlled.

Weldment at low temperature

Weldment temperature has a major influence on susceptibility to crackingmainly by influencing the rate at which H can move (diffuse) through theweld and HAZ. While a weld is relatively warm (>~300°C) H will diffuse quiterapidly and escape into the atmosphere rather than be trapped and causeembrittlement.

Page 122: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 122/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Weldability of Steels

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010 

Reducing the influence of low weldment temperature (and the risk oftrapping H in the weldment) can be effected by:

•  Applying a suitable pre-heat temperature (typically 50 to ~250°C)

•  Preventing the weld from cooling down quickly after each pass bymaintaining the preheat and the specific interpass temperature during

welding•  Maintaining the pre-heat temperature (or raising it to ~250°C) when

welding has finished and holding the joint at this temperature for anumber of hours (minimum 2) to facilitate the escape of H (called post-heat *)

*Post-heat must not be confused with PWHT at a temperature ≥~600°C

3.4 Hydrogen cracking in weld metal

Hydrogen cracks can form in steel weld metal under certain circumstances.The mechanism of cracking, and identification of all the influencing factors,

is less clearly understood than for HAZ cracking but it can occur whenwelding conditions cause H to become trapped in weld metal rather than inHAZ. However it is recognised that welds in higher strength materials,thicker sections and using large beads are the most common areas whereproblems arise.

Hydrogen cracks in weld metal usually lie at 45° to the direction of principaltensile stress in the weld metal and this is usually the longitudinal axis of theweld (Figure 3). In some cases the cracks are of a V formation, hence analternative name chevron cracking.

There are not any well-defined rules for avoiding weld metal hydrogen

cracks apart from:

•  Ensure a low hydrogen welding process is used

•  Apply preheat and maintain a specific interpass temperature

BS EN 1011-2 entitled ‘Welding – Recommendations for welding of metallicmaterials – Part 2: Arc welding of ferritic steels’ gives in Annex C practicalguidelines about how to avoid H cracking. Practical controls are basedprincipally on the application of pre-heat and control of potential Hassociated with the welding process.

Page 123: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 123/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Weldability of Steels

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010 

4 Solidif ication Cracking

The technically correct name for cracks that form during weld metalsolidification is solidification cracks but other names are sometimes usedwhen referring to this type of cracking

•  Hot cracking - they occur at high temperatures – while the weld is hot•  Centreline cracking - cracks may appear down the centreline of the weld

bead

•  Crater cracking - small cracks in weld craters are solidification cracks

Because a weld metal may be particularly susceptible to solidificationcracking it may be said to show hot shortness because it is short of ductilitywhen hot and so tends to crack.

Figure 4  shows a transverse section of a weld with a typical centrelinesolidification crack.

4.1 Factors influencing susceptibility to solidification cracking

Solidification cracking occurs when three conditions exist at the same time: 

•  Weld metal has a susceptible chemical composition

•  Welding conditions used give an unfavourable bead shape

•  High level of restraint or tensile stresses present in the weld area

4.2 Cracking mechanism

 All weld metals solidify over a temperature range and since solidificationstarts at the fusion line towards the centreline of the weld pool, during the

last stages of weld bead solidification there may be enough liquid present toform a weak zone in the centre of the bead. This liquid film is the result oflow melting point constituents being pushed ahead of the solidification front.

During solidification, tensile stresses start to build-up due to contraction ofthe solid parts of the weld bead, and it is these stresses that can cause theweld bead to rupture. These circumstances result in a weld bead showing acentreline crack that is present as soon as the bead has been deposited.

Centreline solidification cracks tend to be surface breaking at some point intheir length and can be easily seen during visual inspection because theytend to be relatively wide cracks.

4.3 Avoiding solidification cracking

 Avoiding solidification cracking requires the influence of one of the factorsresponsible, to be reduced to an inactive level.

Page 124: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 124/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Weldability of Steels

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010 

Weld metal composition

Most C and C-Mn steel weld metals made by modern steelmaking methodsdo not have chemical compositions that are particularly sensitive tosolidification cracking.

However, these weld metals can become sensitive to this type of cracking ifthey are contaminated with elements, or compounds, that produce relativelylow melting point films in weld metal.

Sulphur and copper are elements that can make steel weld metal sensitiveto solidification cracking if they are present in the weld at relatively highlevels. Sulphur contamination may lead to the formation of iron sulphidesthat remain liquid when the bead has cooled down as low as ~980°C,whereas bead solidification starts at above 1400°C.

The source of sulphur may be contamination by oil or grease or it could bepicked up from the less refined parent steel being welded by dilution into the

weld.

Copper contamination in weld metal can be similarly harmful because it haslow solubility in steel and can form films that are still molten at ~1100°C.

 Avoiding solidification cracking (of an otherwise non-sensitive weld metal)requires the avoidance of contamination with potentially harmful materialsby ensuring:

•  Weld joints are thoroughly cleaned immediately before welding

•  Any copper containing welding accessories are suitable/in suitablecondition - such as backing-bars and contact tips used for GMAW, FCAW

and SAW

Unfavourable welding conditions

Unfavourable welding conditions are those that encourage weld beads tosolidify so that low melting point films become trapped at the centre of asolidifying weld bead and become the weak zones for easy crack formation.

Figure 5 shows a weld bead that has solidified using unfavourable weldingconditions associated with centreline solidification cracking.

The weld bead has a cross-section that is quite deep and narrow – a width-

to-depth ratio <~2 and the solidifying dendrites have pushed the lowermelting point liquid to the centre of the bead where it has become trapped.Since the surrounding material is shrinking as a result of cooling, this filmwould be subjected to tensile stress, which leads to cracking.

Page 125: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 125/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Weldability of Steels

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010 

In contrast, Figure 6  shows a bead that has a width-to-depth ratio that is>>2. This bead shape shows lower melting point liquid pushed ahead of thesolidifying dendrites but it does not become trapped at the bead centre.Thus, even under tensile stresses resulting from cooling, this film is self-healing and cracking is avoided

SAW and spray-transfer GMAW are more likely to give weld beads with anunfavourable width-to-depth ratio than the other arc welding processes. Also, electron beam and laser welding processes are extremely sensitive tothis kind of cracking as a result of the deep, narrow beads produced.

 Avoiding unfavourable welding conditions that lead to centrelinesolidification cracking (of weld metals with sensitive compositions) mayrequire significant changes to welding parameters, such as reducing the: 

•  Welding current (to give a shallower bead)and

•  Welding speed (to give a wider weld bead)

 Avoiding unfavourable welding conditions that lead to crater cracking of asensitive weld metal requires changes to the technique used at the end of aweld when the arc is extinguished, such as:

•  For TIG welding, use a current slope-out device so that the current, andweld pool depth gradually reduce before the arc is extinguished (givesmore favourable weld bead width-to-depth ratio). It is also a commonpractice to backtrack the bead slightly before breaking the arc or lengthenthe arc gradually to avoid crater cracks.

•  For TIG welding, modify weld pool solidification mode by feeding the filler

wire into the pool until solidification is almost complete and avoiding aconcave crater

•  For MMA, modify the weld pool solidification mode by reversing thedirection of travel at the end of the weld run so that crater is filled

Page 126: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 126/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Weldability of Steels

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010 

5 Lamellar Tearing

Lamellar tearing is a type of cracking that occurs only in steel plate or otherrolled products underneath a weld.

Characteristics of lamellar tearing are:

•  Cracks only occur in the rolled products eg plate and sections.

•  Most common in C-Mn steels

•  Cracks usually form close to, but just outside, the HAZ

•  Cracks tend to lie parallel to surface of the material (and the fusionboundary of the weld), having a stepped aspect

The above characteristics can be seen in Figure 7a.

5.1 Factors influencing susceptibility to lamellar tearing

Lamellar tearing occurs when two conditions exist at the same time:

•  A susceptible rolled plate is used to make a weld joint

•  High stresses act in the through-thickness direction of the susceptiblematerial (known as the short-transverse direction)

Susceptible rolled plate

 A material that is susceptible to lamellar tearing has very low ductility in thethrough-thickness direction (short-transverse direction) and is only able toaccommodate the residual stresses from welding by tearing rather than byplastic straining.

Low through-thickness ductility in rolled products is caused by the presenceof numerous non-metallic inclusions in the form of elongated stringers. Theinclusions form in the ingot but are flattened and elongated during hot rollingof the material.

Non-metallic inclusions associated with lamellar tearing are principallymanganese sulphides and manganese silicates.

High through-thickness stress

Weld joints that are T, K and Y configurations end up with a tensileresidual stress component in the through-thickness direction .

The magnitude of the through-thickness stress increases as the restraint(rigidity) of the joint increases. Section thickness and size of weld are themain influencing factors and it is in thick section, full penetration T, K and Y joints that lamellar tearing is more likely to occur.

Page 127: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 127/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Weldability of Steels

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010 

5.2 Cracking mechanism

High stresses in the through-thickness direction, that are present as weldingresidual stresses, cause the inclusion stringers to open-up (de-cohese) andthe thin ligaments between individual de-cohesed inclusions then tear andproduce a stepped crack.

Figure 7b shows a typical step-like lamellar tear.

5.3 Avoid ing lamellar tearing

Lamellar tearing can be avoided by reducing the influence of one, or both, ofthe factors.

Susceptible rolled plateEN 10164 (Steel products with improved deformation propertiesperpendicular to the surface of the product – Technical delivery conditions)gives guidance on the procurement of plate to resist lamellar tearing.

Resistance to lamellar tearing can be evaluated by means of tensile testpieces taken with their axes perpendicular to the plate surface (the through-thickness direction). Through-thickness ductility is measured as the %reduction of area (%R of A) at the point of fracture of the tensile test piece(Figure 8).

The greater the measured %R of A, the greater the resistance to lamellartearing. Values in excess of ~20% indicate good resistance even in veryhighly constrained joints.

Reducing the susceptibility of rolled plate to lamellar tearing can be

achieved by ensuring that it has good through-thickness ductility by:

•  Using clean steel that has low sulphur content (<~0.015%) andconsequently has relatively few inclusions

•  Procuring steel plate that has been subjected to through-thickness tensiletesting to demonstrate good through-thickness ductility (as EN 10164)

Through-thickness stress

Through thickness stress in T, K and Y joints is principally the residualstress from welding, although the additional service stress may have someinfluence.

Page 128: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 128/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Weldability of Steels

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010 

Reducing the magnitude of through-thickness stresses for a particular weld joint would require modification to the joint, in some way, and so may notalways be practical because of the need to satisfy design requirements.However, methods that could be considered are:

•  Reducing the size of the weld by:

•  Using a partial penetration butt weld instead of full-penetration•  Using fillet welds instead of a full, or a partial pen. butt weld (Figure 9)•  By applying a buttering layer of weld metal to the surface of a susceptible

plate so that the highest through-thickness strain is located in the weldmetal and not the susceptible plate (Figure 10)

•  Changing the joint design – such as using a forged or extrudedintermediate piece so that the susceptible plate does not experiencethrough-thickness stress (Figure 11) 

Page 129: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 129/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Weldability of Steels

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010 

FIGURES:

Figure 1 Typical locations of hydrogen induced cold cracks.

Figure 2 Hydrogen induced cold crack that initiated the HAZ at the toe of a filletweld.

Page 130: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 130/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Weldability of Steels

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010 

Figure 3a) Plan view of a plate butt weld showing subsurface transverse cracks;b Longitudinal section X-Y of the above weld showing how the transverse cracks

actually lie at 45° to the surface. They tend to remain within an individual weld runand may be in weld several layers. Their appearance in this orientation has givenrise to the name ‘chevron’ cracks (arrow shaped cracks).

Weld layers withcracks lying at 45°

to X-Y axis

b)

Y

X

tTransversecracks

a)

Page 131: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 131/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Weldability of Steels

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010 

Figure 4a) Solidification crack at the weld bean centre where columnar dendrites have trapped

some lower melting point liquidb) The weld bead does not have an ideal shape but it has solidified without the dendrites

meeting ‘end-on’ and trapping lower melting point liquid thereby resisting solidification

cracking.

a

b

Page 132: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 132/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Weldability of Steels

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010 

Figure 5 A weld bead with an unfavourable width-to-depth ratio. This is responsible forliquid metal being pushed into the centre of the bead by the advancing columnardendrites and becoming the weak zone that is ruptured.

Figure 6 Weld bead with a favourable width-to-depth ratio. The dendrites push the lowestmelting point metal towards the surface at the centre of the bead centre and so it does not

form a weak central zone.

WW

DD

DDiirreeccttiioonn oof f  

ttrraavveell 

W/D > ~2

WW

DD 

DDiirreeccttiioonn oof f  

ttrraavveell 

W/D < 2

Page 133: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 133/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Weldability of Steels

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010 

Figure 7:a) Typical lamellar tear located just outside the visible HAZb) Step-like crack characteristic of a lamellar tear.

a)

Inclusionstringer

Through-thicknessresidual stresses

from welding

De-cohesionof inclusion

b)

Crack propagation by tearingof ligaments between

‘de-cohesed’ inclusion stringers

HAZ

Fusionboundary

Page 134: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 134/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Weldability of Steels

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010 

Figure 8 Round tensile test piece taken with its axis in the short-transverse direction (throughthickness of plate) to measure the % R. of A. and assess the plate’s resistance to lamellartearing.

PPllaattee ssuur r f f aaccee 

PPllaattee ssuur r f f aaccee 

TThhr r oouugghh--tthhiicckknneessss tteennssiillee tteesstt ppiieeccee 

RReedduuccttiioonn oof f  ddiiaammeetteer r  aatt 

ppooiinntt oof f  f f r r aaccttuur r ee 

Page 135: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 135/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Weldability of Steels

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010 

Figure 9 Reducing the effective size of a weld will reduce the through-thickness stress onthe susceptible plate and may be sufficient to reduce the risk of lamellar tearing.

Figure 10 Lamellar tearing can be avoided by changing the joint design.

Susceptible plate Susceptible plate

Susceptible plate Extruded section

Page 136: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 136/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Weldability of Steels

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010 

Weld metal ‘buttering’

Figure 11 Two layers of weld metal (usually by MMA) applied to susceptibleplate before the T-butt weld is made.

Susceptible plate

Page 137: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 137/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Weld Fractures

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010 

Welds may suffer three different fracture mechanisms:

•  Ductile

•  Brittle

•  Fatigue

Often a complete fracture of a weldment will be a combination of fracturetypes eg initially fatigue followed by final ductile fracture.

1 Ductile Fractures

Occur in instances where the strength and the cross-sectional area of thematerial are insufficient to carry the applied load.

Such fractures are commonly seen on material and welding proceduretensile test specimens where failure is accompanied by yielding, stretchingand thinning as shown below.

The fracture edges are at 45° to the applied load and are known as shearlips.

Brittle fractureIs a fast, unstable type of fracture which can lead to catastrophic failure.

The phenomenon was first identified during World War 2 when many LibertyShips broke in two for no apparent reason. Since that time many brittlefailures have occurred in bridges, boilers, pressure vessels etc sometimeswith loss of life and always with expensive damage.

Page 138: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 138/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Weld Fractures

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010 

The risk of brittle fracture increases;

•  As the temperature (ambient or operational) decreases

•  With the type and increasing thickness of the material

•  Where high levels of residual stresses are present

•  In the presence of notches.

•  Increased strain rate ie speed of loading

Eeffect of notch on a tensile specimen.

Distinguishing features of a brittle fracture are:

•  Surface is flat and at 90° to the applied load.

•  Will show little or no plastic deformation

•  The surface will be rough and may be crystalline in appearance.

•  May show chevrons which will point back to the initiation source.

Courtesy of Douglas E. Williams, P.E., Welding Handbook, Vol.1,Ninth Edition, reprinted by permission of the American Welding Society 

Page 139: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 139/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Weld Fractures

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010 

Brittle fracture surface on a CTOD test piece.

Fatigue fracture

Fatigue fractures occur in situations where loading is of a cyclic nature andat stress levels well below the yield stress of the material.

Typically fatigue cracks will be found on bridges, cranes, aircraft and itemsaffected by out of balance or vibrating forces.

Initiation takes place from stress concentrations such as changes of section,

arc- strikes, toes of welds. Even the best designed and made welds havesome degree of stress concentration.

 As fatigue cracks take time firstly to initiate then to grow, this slowprogression allows such cracks to be found by regular inspection scheduleson those items known to be fatigue sensitive.

The growth rate of fatigue cracks is dependant on the loading and thenumber of cycles. It is not time dependant

Fatigue failures are not restricted to any one type of material or temperaturerange. Stress-relief has little effect upon fatigue life.

Structures known to be at risk of fatigue failure are usually designed tocodes that acknowledge the risk and lays down the rules and calculations topredict its design life.

Page 140: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 140/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Weld Fractures

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010 

Typical fatigue fracture in a T joint.

Identifying features of fatigue fracture are:

•  Very smooth fracture surface, although may have steps due to multipleinitiation points.

•  Bounded by curved crack front

•  Bands may be visible indicating crack progression.

•  Initiation point opposite curve crack front

•  Surface at 90° to applied loading

Fatigue cracks sometimes stop of their own accord if the crack runs into anarea of low stress. On the other hand they may grow until the remainingcross-section in insufficient to support the applied loads. At this point finalfailure will take place by a secondary mechanism ie ductile or brittle.

Page 141: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 141/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Weld Fractures

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010 

 Assessment o f f racture sur faces

The Senior Welding Inspector’s examination requires fracture surfaces to beassessed. This should be done in the following manner:

•  Make a sketch of the fracture specimen.

•  Indicate on the sketch the salient features ie initiation point (Note: Theremay be more than one ignition point), the first mode of failure and the

second mode of failure, if there is one.

•  For each of these indicated features describe what it is and how yourecognised it.

Page 142: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 142/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Welding Symbols

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010 

 A weld joint can be represented on an engineering drawing by means of adetailed sketch showing every detail and dimension of the joint preparation- as shown below.

While this method of representation gives comprehensive information, itcan be time-consuming and can also overburden the drawing.

 An alternative method is to use a symbolic representation to specify therequired information - as shown below for the same joint detail.

Symbolic representation has follow ing advantages:

•  Simple and quick to put on the drawing

•  Does not over-burden the drawing

•  No need for an additional view - all welding symbols can be put on themain assembly drawing

Symbolic representation has following d isadvantages:

•  Can only be used for standard joints (eg BS EN ISO 9692)

•  There is not a way of giving precise dimensions for joint details•  Some training is necessary in order to interpret the symbols correctly

8-12° 

≈R6

1-4mm

1-3mm

Single U preparation

Page 143: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 143/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Welding Symbols

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010 

1 Standards for Symbolic Representation of WeldedJoints on Drawings

There are two principal standards that are used for welding symbols:

European Standard

EN22553 – Welded, brazed & soldered joints – Symbolic representation ondrawings

 American Standard 

 AWS A2.4 – Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, & Non-destructiveExamination

These standards are very similar in many respects, but there are alsosome major differences that need to be understood to avoid mis-interpretation.

Details of the European Standard are given in the following sub-sectionswith only brief information about how the American Standard differs fromthe European Standard.

Elementary Welding Symbols

Various types of weld joint are represented by a symbol that is intended tohelp interpretation by being similar to the shape of the weld to be made.

Examples of symbols used by EN 22553 are shown on following pages.

Page 144: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 144/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Welding Symbols

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010 

2 Elementary Welding Symbols

Designation Illustration of joint preparation Symbol

Square butt weld

Single V butt weld

Single bevel butt weld

Single V butt weld withbroad root face

Single bevel butt weldwith broad root face

Single U butt weld

Single J butt weld

Fillet weld

Surfacing (cladding)

Backing run(back or backing weld)

Backing bar

Page 145: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 145/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Welding Symbols

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010 

3 Combination of Elementary Symbols

For symmetrical welds made from both sides, the applicable elementarysymbols are combined – as shown below.

Designation Illustration of joint preparation Symbol

Double V buttweld (X weld)

Double bevel buttweld (K weld)

Double U butt

weld

Double J buttweld

Page 146: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 146/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Welding Symbols

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010 

4 Supplementary Symbols

Weld symbols may be complemented by a symbol to indicate the requiredshape of the weld.

Examples of supplementary symbols and how they are applied are given

below.

Designation Illustration of joint preparation Symbol

Flat (flush)single V buttweld

Convex double

V butt weld

Concave filletweld

Flat (flush)

single V buttweld with flat(flush) backingrun

Single V buttweld with broadroot face andbacking run

Fillet weld withboth toesblendedsmoothly

Note: If the weld symbol does not have a supplementary symbol then the shape of theweld surface does not need to be indicated precisely. 

Page 147: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 147/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Welding Symbols

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010 

5 Position of Symbols on Drawings

In order to be able to provide comprehensive details for weld joints, it isnecessary to distinguish the two sides of the weld joint.

The way this is done, according to EN 22553, is by means of:

•  An arrow line

•  A dual reference line consisting of a continuous line and a dashed line

Below illustrates the method of representation.

6 Relationship between the Arrow Line and the JointLine

One end of the joint line is called the arrow side and the opposite end iscalled other side.

The arrow side is always the end of the joint line that the arrow line pointsto (and touches).

It can be at either end of the joint line and it is the draughtsman whodecides which end to make the arrow side.

Joint line

1

2a

2b

3

1 = Arrow line2a = Reference line

(continuous line)2b = Identification line

(dashed line)3 = Welding symbol(single V joint) 

Page 148: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 148/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Welding Symbols

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010 

Below illustrates these principles.

There are some conventions about the arrow line:

•  It must touch one end of the joint line

•  It joins one end of the continuous reference line.

•  In case of a non-symmetrical joint, such as a single bevel joint, thearrow line must point towards the joint member that will have the weldpreparation put on to it (as shown below)

 An example of how a single-bevel butt joint should be represented isshown below.

7 Position of the Reference Line and Position of theWeld Symbol

The reference line should, wherever possible, be drawn parallel to thebottom edge of the drawing (or perpendicular to it).

For a non-symmetrical weld it is essential that the arrow side and otherside of the weld be distinguished. The convention for doing this is:

•  Symbols for the weld details required on the arrow side must be placedon the continuous line

•  Symbols for the weld details on other side must be placed on thedashed line

‘arrow side’

‘arrow side’

 arrow line

‘other side’

 arrow line

‘other side’

 

arrow line

 ‘arrow side’ ‘other side’

  arrow line

  ‘other side’ ‘arrow side’

Page 149: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 149/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Welding Symbols

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010 

8 Positions of the Continuous Line and theDashed Line

EN 22553 allows the dashed line to be either above or below thecontinuous line – as shown below.

If the weld is a symmetrical weld then it is not necessary to distinguishbetween the two sides and EN 22553 states that the dashed line should beomitted. Thus, a single V butt weld with a backing run can be shown byeither of the four symbolic representations shown below.

Note: This flexibility with the position of the continuous and dashed lines is aninterim measure that EN 22553 allows so that old drawings (to the obsoleteBS 499 Part 2, for example) can be conveniently converted to show the ENmethod of representation.

or

Single V weld with a backing run

 Arrow side

 Arrow side

Other side

Other side

 Arrow side

Other side Arrow side

Other side

Page 150: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 150/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Welding Symbols

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010 

9 Dimensioning of Welds

General rules

Dimensions may need to be specified for some types of weld and EN22553 specifies a convention for this.

•  Dimensions for the cross-section of the weld are written on the left-handside of the symbol

•  Length dimensions for the weld are written on the righthand side of thesymbol

•  In the absence of any indication to the contrary, all butt welds are fullpenetration welds

9.1 Symbols for cross-section dimensions

The following letters are used to indicate dimensions:

a Fillet weld throat thickness

Z Fillet weld leg lengths Penetration depth

(Applicable to partial penetration butt welds and deep penetrationfillets.) 

Some examples of how these symbols are used are shown below.

Partial penetrationsingle V butt weld

s10

8mm

Z8

Fillet weld with 8mm leg

Page 151: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 151/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Welding Symbols

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010 

9.2 Symbols for length dimensions

To specify weld length dimensions and, for intermittent welds the numberof individual weld lengths (weld elements), the following letters are used: -

l Length of weld

(e)  Distance between adjacent weld elements

n Number of weld elements

The use of these letters is illustrated for the intermittent double-sided filletweld shown below.

a6Fillet weld with 6mm throat

6mm

150mm

100mm

Plan view End view

Note: dashed line not required because it is a symmetrical weld

Z8 3 × 150 (100)

Z8 z n× l (e)

z n× l (e)  3 × 150 (100)z z n× l ( e)

z n× l ( e)  n × l (e)z n × l (e)

Page 152: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 152/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Welding Symbols

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010 

If an intermittent double-sided fillet weld is to be staggered, the conventionfor indicating this is shown below.

9.3 Complementary indications

Complementary indications may be needed to specify other characteristicsof welds. Examples are:

•  Field or site welds is indicated by a flag

•  A peripheral weld, to be made all around a part, is indicated by a circle

z n× l (e)

z n× 

l (e)

Plan view End view

l (e)

z

Page 153: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 153/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Welding Symbols

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010 

10 Indication of the Welding Process

If required, the welding process is to be symbolised by a number writtenbetween the two branches of a fork at the end of the reference line – asshown below.

11 Other Information in the Tail of the Reference Line

In addition to specifying the welding process, other information can beadded to an open tail (shown above) such as the NDT acceptance level

the working position and the filler metal type and EN 22553 defines thesequence that must be used for this information.

 A closed tail can also be used into which reference to a specific instructioncan be added – as shown below.

12 Weld Symbols in Accordance with AWS 2.4

Many of the symbols and conventions that are specified by EN 22553 arethe same as those used by AWS.

The major differences are:

•  Only one reference line is used (a continuous line)

•  Symbols for weld details on the arrow side  go underneath thereference l ine 

•  Symbols for weld details on the other side go on top of the referenceline 

111

Some welding process

designations

111 = MMA121 = SAW131 = MIG135 = MAG141 = TIG

WPS 014

Page 154: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 154/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Welding Symbols

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010 

These differences are illustrated by the following example.

13 Drawing Review

Drawings are often made by personnel not familiar with the relevantsymbol rules which results in drawings that are difficult to interpret orambiguous in their intent.

 As part of the CSWIP 3.2 examination candidates will need to demonstratetheir competence at interpreting such an engineering drawing in respect ofits welding symbols. To do this:

•  The candidate first needs to establish the symbol system being used.

•  Next study the views and part sections of the object so that it can bevisualised in its manufactured form.

•  For each of the designated symbols, draw a sketch of what the joint willlook like according to the symbol.

•  Next describe the joint in words, together with any supplementaryinformation, eg field weld, ground flush, welding process, other places,etc. which has been given.

•  If any thing is wrong with the symbol such as the dashed line ismissing, the symbol is the wrong way around, the described jointcannot be put on the material in the manner shown, write down theproblem but do not suggest how it should be made.

 Arrow

Other side

Page 155: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 155/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010NDT

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010 

IntroductionRadiographic, ultrasonic, dye-penetrant and magnetic particle methods arebriefly described below. The relative advantages and limitations of themethods are discussed in terms of their applicability to the examination ofwelds.

1 Radiographic MethodsIn all cases radiographic methods as applied to welds involve passing abeam of penetrating radiation through the test object. The transmittedradiation is collected by some form of sensor, which is capable of measuringthe relative intensities of penetrating radiations impinging upon it. In mostcases this sensor will be a radiographic film; however the use of variouselectronic devices is on the increase. These devices facilitate so-called realtime radiography and examples may be seen in the security check area atmost airports. Digital technology has enabled the storing of radiographsusing computers. The present discussion is confined to film radiographysince this is still by far the most common method applied to welds.

1.1 Sources of penetrating radiation

Penetrating radiations may be generated from high-energy electron beams,in which case they are termed X rays, or from nuclear disintegrations

(atomic fission), in which case they are termed γ-rays. Other forms ofpenetrating radiation exist but they are of limited interest in weldradiography.

1.2 X rays

X rays used in the industrial radiography of welds generally have photonenergies in the range 30keV up to 20MeV. Up to 400keV they are generatedby conventional X ray tubes which dependant upon output may be suitablefor portable or fixed installations. Portability falls off rapidly with increasingkilovoltage and radiation output. Above 400keV X rays are produced usingdevices such as betatrons and linear accelerators. These devices are notgenerally suitable for use outside of fixed installations. All sources of X raysproduce a continuous spectrum of radiation, reflecting the spread of kineticenergies of electrons within the electron beam. Low energy radiations aremore easily absorbed and the presence of low energy radiations, within theX ray beam, gives rise to better radiographic contrast and therefore better

radiographic sensitivity than is the case with γ-rays which are discussedbelow. Conventional X ray units are capable of performing high quality

radiography on steel of up to 60mm thickness, betatrons and linearaccelerators are capable of penetrating in excess of 300mm of steel.

Page 156: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 156/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010NDT

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010 

1.3 -rays

The early sources of γ-rays used in industrial radiography were in generalcomposed of naturally occurring radium. The activity of these sources wasnot very high, therefore they were physically rather large by modernstandards even for quite modest outputs of radiation and the radiographs

produced by them were not of a particularly high standard. Radium sourceswere also extremely hazardous to the user due to the production ofradioactive radon gas as a product of the fission reaction. Since the adventof the nuclear age it has been possible to artificially produce isotopes ofmuch higher specific activity than those occurring naturally and which do notproduce hazardous fission products. Unlike the X-ray sources γ-sources donot produce a continuous distribution of quantum energies. γ-sourcesproduce a number of specific quantum energies which are unique for anyparticular isotope. Four isotopes are in common use for the radiography ofwelds; they are in ascending order of radiation energy: thulium 90, ytterbium169, iridium 192 and cobalt 60. In terms of steel thulium 90 is useful up to athickness of 7mm or so, it’s energy is similar to that of 90keV X rays and

due to it’s high specific activity useful sources can be produced with physicaldimensions of less than 0.5mm. Ytterbium 169 has only fairly recentlybecome available as an isotope for industrial use, it’s energy is similar tothat of 120keV X rays and it is useful for the radiography of steel up toapproximately 12mm thickness. Iridium 192 is probably the most commonlyencountered isotopic source of radiation used in the radiographicexamination of welds, it has a relatively high specific activity and high outputsources with physical dimensions of 2-3mm are in common usage, it’senergy is approximately equivalent to that of 500 keV X rays and it is usefulfor the radiography of steel in the thickness range 10-75mm. Cobalt 60 hasan energy approximating to that of 1.2MeV X rays, due this relatively highenergy suitable source containers are large and rather heavy. Cobalt 60sources are for this reason not fully portable. They are useful for theradiography of steel in the thickness range 40-150mm.

The major advantages of using isotopic sources over X rays are: a) Theincreased portability; b) The lack of the need for a power source; c) Lowerinitial equipment costs. Against this the quality of radiographs produced byγ-ray techniques is inferior to that produced by X ray techniques, thehazards to personnel may be increased (if the equipment is not properlymaintained, or if the operating personnel have insufficient training), and dueto their limited useful lifespan new isotopes have to be purchased on aregular basis (so that the operating costs of a γ-ray source may exceed

those of an X ray source).

Page 157: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 157/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010NDT

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010 

1.4 Radiography of welds

Radiographic techniques depend upon detecting differences in absorption ofthe beam ie: changes in the effective thickness of the test object, in order toreveal defective areas. Volumetric weld defects such as slag inclusions(except in some special cases where the slag absorbs radiation to a greater

extent than does the weld metal) and various forms of gas porosity areeasily detected by radiographic techniques due to the large negativeabsorption difference between the parent metal and the slag or gas. Planardefects such as cracks or lack of side wall or interun fusion are much lesslikely to be detected by radiography since such defects may cause little orno change in the penetrated thickness. Where defects of this type are likelyto occur other NDE techniques such as ultrasonic testing are preferable toradiography. This lack of sensitivity to planar defects makes radiography anunsuitable technique where a fitness-for-purpose approach is taken whenassessing the acceptability of a weld. However, film radiography produces apermanent record of the weld condition, which can be archived for futurereference; it also provides an excellent means of assessing the welder’s

performance and for these reasons it is often still the preferred method fornew construction.

Figure 1: X ray equipment Figure 2 Gamma-ray equipment

Page 158: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 158/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010NDT

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010 

Figure 3: X ray of a welded seam showing porosity

1.5 Radiographic testing

 Advantages Limitat ions  

• Permanent record• Good for sizing non planar

defects/flaws• Can be used on all materials• Direct image of defects/flaws

• Real-time imaging• Can be position inside pipe(productivity)

• Very good thicknesspenetration available

• No power required withgamma

• Health hazard. Safety (important) ••  CCllaassssiif f iieedd wwoor r kkeer r ss,, mmeeddiiccaallss r r eeqquuiir r eedd ••  SSeennssiittiivvee ttoo ddeef f eecctt oor r iieennttaattiioonn ••  NNoott ggoooodd f f oor r  ppllaannaar r  ddeef f eecctt ddeetteeccttiioonn ••  LLiimmiitteedd aabbiilliittyy ttoo ddeetteecctt f f iinnee ccr r aacckkss 

••  A Acccceessss ttoo bbootthh ssiiddeess r r eeqquuiir r eedd ••  SSkkiilllleedd iinntteer r ppr r eettaattiioonn r r eeqquuiir r eedd ••  RReellaattiivveellyy ssllooww ••  HHiigghh ccaappiittaall oouuttllaayy aanndd r r uunnnniinngg ccoossttss ••  IIssoottooppeess hhaavvee aa hhaallf f  lliif f ee ((ccoosstt)) 

Page 159: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 159/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010NDT

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010 

2 Ultrasonic Methods

The velocity of ultrasound in any given material is a constant for thatmaterial and ultrasonic beams travel in straight lines in homogeneousmaterials. When ultrasonic waves pass from a given material with a givensound velocity to a second material with different velocity refraction and

reflection of the sound beam will occur at the boundary between the twomaterials. The same laws of physics apply equally to ultrasonic waves asthey do to light waves. Because ultrasonic waves are refracted at aboundary between two materials having different acoustic properties, probesmay be constructed which can beam sound into a material at (within certainlimits) any given angle. Because sound is reflected at a boundary betweentwo materials having different acoustic properties ultrasound is a useful toolfor the detection of weld defects. Because the velocity is a constant for anygiven material and because sound travels in a straight line (with the rightequipment) ultrasound can also be utilised to give accurate positionalinformation about a given reflector. Careful observation of the echo patternof a given reflector and its behaviour as the ultrasonic probe is moved

together with the positional information obtained above and knowledge ofthe component history enables the experienced ultrasonic operator toclassify the reflector as say slag lack of fusion or a crack.

2.1 Equipment for ultrasonic testing

Equipment for manual ultrasonic testing consists of:

 A) A flaw detector comprising:

•  Pulse generator,

•  Adjustable time base generator with an adjustable delay control,

•  Cathode ray tube with fully rectified display.

•  Calibrated amplifier with a graduated gain control or attenuator)

B) An ultrasonic probe comprising:

•  Piezo-electric crystal element capable of converting electrical vibrationsto mechanical vibrations and vice-versa

•  Probe shoe, normally a perspex block to which the crystal is firmlyattached using a suitable adhesive

•  Electrical and/or mechanical crystal damping facilities to preventexcessive ringing

Page 160: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 160/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010NDT

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010 

Such equipment is lightweight and extremely portable. Automated or semi-automated systems for ultrasonic testing utilise the same basic equipmentalthough since in general this will be multi-channel equipment it is bulkierand less portable. Probes for automated systems are set in arrays andsome form of manipulator is necessary in order to feed positionalinformation about the probes to the computer. Automated systems generate

very large amounts of data and make large demands upon the RAM of thecomputer. Recent advances in automated UT have led to a reduced amountof data being recorded for a given length of weld. Simplified probe arrayshave greatly reduced the complexity of setting up the automated system tocarry out a particular task. Automated UT systems now provide a seriousalternative to radiography on such constructions as pipelines where a largenumber of similar inspections allow the unit cost of system development tobe reduced to a competitive level.

Figure 4: Ultrasonic equipment

Figure 5 Compression and shear wave probes

Page 161: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 161/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010NDT

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010 

Figure 6 Scanning technique with a shear wave probe

Figure 7 Typical screen display when using a shear wave probe

2.2 Ultrasonic testing

 Advantages Limitat ions

Portable (no mains power) battery 

Direct location of defect (3 dimensional)

Good for complex geometrySafe operation (can be carried out nextto someone)

Instant results

High penetrating capability

Can be done from one side only

Good for finding planar defects

No permanent record

Only ferritic materials (mainly)

High level of operator skill requiredCalibration of equipment required

Special calibration blocks required

No good for pin pointing porosity

Critical of surface conditions (cleansmooth)

Will not detect surface defects

Material thickness >8mm due to deadzone

Page 162: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 162/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010NDT

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010 

3 Magnetic Particle Testing

Surface breaking or very near surface discontinuities in ferromagneticmaterials give rise to leakage fields when high levels of magnetic flux areapplied. These leakage fields will attract magnetic particles (finely dividedmagnetite) to themselves and this process leads to the formation of an

indication. The magnetic particles may be visibly or fluorescently pigmentedin order to provide contrast with the substrate or conversely the substratemay be lightly coated with a white background lacquer in order to contrastwith the particles. Fluorescent magnetic particles provide the greatestsensitivity. The particles will normally be in a liquid suspension and this willnormally be applied by spraying. In certain cases dry particles may beapplied by a gentle jet of air. The technique is applicable only toferromagnetic materials, which are at a temperature below the curie point(about 650°C). The leakage field will be greatest for linear discontinuitieslying at right angles to the magnetic field. This means that for acomprehensive test the magnetic field must normally be applied in twodirections, which are mutually perpendicular. The test is economical to carry

out both in terms of equipment costs and rapidity of inspection. The level ofoperator training required is relatively low.

Figure 8 Magnetic particle inspection using a yoke

Figure 9 Crack found using magnetic particle inspection

Page 163: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 163/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010NDT

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010 

3.1 Magnetic particle testing

 Advantages Limitat ions

Inexpensive equipment

Direct location of defect

Not critical of surfaceconditions

Could be applied withoutpower

Low skill level

Sub defects surface 1-2mm

Quick instant results

Hot testing (using dry powder)

Can be used in the dark (UV

light

Only magnetic materials

May need to demagnetise components

 Access may be a problem for the yoke

Need power if using a yoke

No permanent record

Calibration of equipment

Testing in two directions required

Need good lighting 500 Lux minimum

Page 164: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 164/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010NDT

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010 

4 Dye Penetrant Testing

 Any liquid that has good wetting properties will act as a penetrant.Penetrants are attracted into surface breaking discontinuities by capillaryforces. Penetrant, which has entered a tight discontinuity, will remain evenwhen the excess penetrant is removed. Application of a suitable developer

will encourage the penetrant within such discontinuities to bleed out. If thereis a suitable contrast between the penetrant and the developer an indicationvisible to the eye will be formed. This contrast may be provided by eithervisible or fluorescent dyes. Use of fluorescent dyes considerably increasesthe sensitivity of the technique. The technique is not applicable at extremesof temperature. At low temperatures (below 5°C) the penetrant vehicle,normally oil will become excessively viscous and this will cause an increasein the penetration time with a consequent decrease in sensitivity. At hightemperatures (above 60°C) the penetrant will dry out and the technique willnot work.

Figure 10 Methods of applying the red dye during dye-penetrant inspection

Figure 11 Crack found using dye-penetrant inspection

Page 165: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 165/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010NDT

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010 

4.1 Dye penetrant

 Advantages   Limitations 

 All materials (non-porous)

Portable

 Applicable to small parts withcomplex geometry

Simple

Inexpensive

Sensitivity

Relatively low skill level (easyto interpret)

Will only detect defects open to thesurface

Requires careful surface preparation

Not applicable to porous surfaces

Temperature dependant

Cannot retest indefinitely

Potentially hazardous chemicals

No permanent record

Time lapse between application andresults

Messy

5 Surface Crack Detection (Magnetic Particle/DyePenetrant): General

When considering the relative value of NDE techniques it should not beforgotten that most catastrophic failures initiate from the surface of acomponent, therefore the value of the magnetic particle and dye Penetranttechniques should not be underestimated. Ultrasonic inspection may notdetect near surface defects easily since the indications may be masked byechoes arising from the component geometry and should therefore besupplemented by an appropriate surface crack detection technique for

maximum test confidence..

Review of NDT documentation

In reviewing or carrying out an audit of NDT reports certain aspects apply toall reports whilst others are specific to a particular technique.

General requirements:

•  Date/ time/stage of inspection

•  Place of inspection

•  Procedure or Standard to which the test was performed

•  Standard used for acceptance criteria

•  Material type and thickness•  Joint configuration

•  All defects identified, located and sized

•  NDT technicians name and qualification

•  Stamped signed and dated

Page 166: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 166/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010NDT

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010 

Ultrasonic specific – note not suitable for all weld metal types

•  Surface finish ie as-welded or ground

•  Type of equipment

•  Probe types – compression and shear wave

•  Probe sizes – usually 10mm

•  Probe frequency – typically 2.5–5MHz•  Probe angles – typically 45, 60 , 70, 90

•  Type of couplant

•  Calibration block type and hole size

•  Calibration range setting

•  Scanning pattern

•  Sensitivity setting

•  Recording level

Radiographic specific

•  Type of radiation – X or gamma

•  Source type, size and strength (curies)

•  Tube focal spot size and power (Kva)

•  Technique eg single wall single image

•  Source/focal spot to film distance

•  Type and range of IQI

•  Type and size of film

•  Type and placement of intensifying screens

•  Exposure time

•  Development temps and times

•  Recorded sensitivity – better than 2%

•  Recorded density range – 2-3.5

Magnetic particle specific – note method su itable for ferritic steels only

•  Method – wet/dry, fluorescent, contrast etc

•  Method of magnetisation- DC or AC

•  Equipment type – prod, yoke, perm. magnet, bench, coils

•  Prod spacing (7.5A/mm)

•  Lift test for magnets – 4.5kg for AC yoke, 18kg for perm. magnet

•  Contrast paint

•  Ink type

•  Prod/yoke test scan sequence – 2 x at 450 to weld c/l.

•  Lighting conditions – 500 Lux min for daylight, 20 Lux for UV

•  UV light -1mW/cm2

•  Flux measurement strips – Burmah-Castrol etc

Page 167: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 167/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010NDT

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010 

Penetrant specific

•  Method – colour contrast or fluorescent

•  Surface preparation

•  Penetrant type

•  Application method and time (5-60min)

•  Method of removal•  Type and application of developer

•  Contrast light – 500 Lux min

•  Black light – 20 Lux

•  Operating temperature - 5–500C

Page 168: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 168/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Welding Consumables

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010 

1 Introduction

Welding consumables are defined as all those things that are used up in theproduction of a weld.

This list could include many things including electrical energy; however we

normally refer to welding consumables as those things used up by aparticular welding process.

1.1 MMA electrodes

MMA electrodes can be categorised according to the type of covering theyhave and consequently the characteristics that it confers.

For C-Mn and low alloy steels there are 3 generic types of electrodes:

•  Cellulosic

•  Rutile

  BasicThese generic names indicate the type of mineral/compound that isdominant in the covering.

1.2 Covered electrode manufacture

Electrode manufacturers produce electrodes by:

•  Straightening and cutting core wire to standard lengths  (typically 300,350, and 450mm depending on electrode classification and diameter)

•  Making a dry mix of powdered compounds/minerals  (precise levels ofadditions depend on individual manufacturers formulations)

•  Making a wet mix by adding the dry powders to a liquid binder•  Extruding the covering (concentrically) on to the core wire

•  Hardening the covering by drying the electrodes1 

•  Carrying out batch tests - as required for electrode certification

•  Packing the electrodes into suitable containers

Page 169: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 169/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Welding Consumables

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010 

For low hydrogen electrodes this is a high temperature bake - ≥~450ºC

•  Vacuum packed  electrodes are packed in small quantities intopackaging that is immediately vacuum sealed – to ensure no moisturepick-up

•  Electrodes that need to be re-baked are packed into standard packets

and as this may be some time after baking, and the packaging may notbe sealed, they do not reach the end-user in a guaranteed low hydrogencondition, they therefore require re-baking at a typical temperature of350ºC for approximately 2 hours, Note! You should always follow themanufacturer’s recommendations.

For individual batch certification this will require the manufacture of a testpad for chemical analysis and may require manufacture of a test weld fromwhich a tensile test and Charpy V notch test pieces are tested

1.3 Electrode coverings

Core wires used for most C-Mn electrodes, and some low alloy steelelectrodes, are a very low C steel* and it is the formulation of the coveringthat determines the composition of the deposited weld metal and theoperating characteristics of the electrode.

(* typically ~ 0.06%C, ~0.5%Mn)

The flux covering on an electrode is formulated to aid the manufacturingprocess and to provide a number of functions during welding.

The major welding functions are:

  Facilitate arc ignition/re-ignition and give arc stabilisation•  Generate gas for shielding the arc and molten metal from contaminationby air

•  Interact with the molten weld metal to give de-oxidation and fluximpurities into the slag to cleanse/refine the molten weld metal

•  Form a slag for protection of the hot weld metal from air contamination

•  Provide elements to give the weld metal the required mechanicalproperties

•  Enable positional welding by means of slag formers that freeze attemperatures above the solidification temperature range of the weld metal

Page 170: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 170/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Welding Consumables

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010 

1.4 Inspection points for MMA consumables

1. Size: Wire diameter and length

2. Condition: Cracks, chips and concentricity

3. Type (specification): Correct specif ication/code 

Checks should also be made to ensure that basic  electrodes   have beenthrough the correct pre-use procedure. Having been baked to the correct

temperature (typically 300-350°C) for   1 hour   and then held in a holding

oven at 150 C before being issued to the welders in heated quivers. Mostelectrode flux coatings will deteriorate rapidly when damp and care shouldbe taken to inspect storage facilities to ensure that they are adequately dry,

and that all electrodes are stored in conditions of controlled temperature andhumidity.

E 46 3 B

Page 171: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 171/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Welding Consumables

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010 

2 Cellulosic Electrodes

Cellulose is the principal substance in this type of electrode and comprisingtypically ~ 40% of the flux constituents.

Cellulose is an organic material (naturally occurring) such as cotton and

wood, but it is wood pulp that is the principal source of cellulose used in themanufacture of electrode coverings.

The main characteristics of cellulosic electrodes are:

•  Cellulose breaks down during welding and produces carbon monoxideand dioxide and hydrogen

•  Hydrogen provides part of the gas shielding function and gives arelatively high arc voltage

•  The high arc voltage gives the electrode a hard and forceful arc with goodpenetration/fusion ability

•  The volume of slag formed is relatively small

•  Cellulosic electrodes cannot be baked during manufacture or beforewelding because this would destroy the cellulose; the manufacturingprocedure is to harden the coating by drying (typically at 70-100ºC)

•  Because of the high hydrogen levels there is always some risk of Hcracking which requires control measures such as hot-pass welding tofacilitate the rapid escape of hydrogen

•  Because of the risk of H cracking there are limits on the strength/composition and thickness of steels on which they can be used  (electrodeare manufactured in classes E60xx, E70xx, E80xx and E90xx but bothlower strength grades tend to be the most commonly used)

•  High toughness at low temperatures cannot be consistently achievedfrom this type of electrode (typically only down to about -20ºC) 

2.1 Applications of cellulosic electrodes

Cellulosic electrodes have characteristics that enable them to be used forvertical-down welding at fast travel speed but with low risk of lack-of-fusionbecause of their forceful arc.

The niche application for this type of electrode is girth seam welding of largediameter steel pipes for overland pipelines (Transco (BGAS) P2, BS 4515and API 1104 applications). No other type of electrode has the ability toallow root pass welding at high speed and still give good root penetrationwhen the root gap is less than ideal.

Because of their penetration ability these electrodes have also foundapplication on oil storage tanks – for vertical and circumferential seamwelding of the upper/thinner courses for which preparations with large rootfaces or square edge preparations are used.

Page 172: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 172/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Welding Consumables

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010 

3 Rutile Electrodes

Rutile is a mineral that consists of about 90% titanium dioxide (TiO2) and ispresent in C and C-Mn steel rutile electrodes at typically ~50%.

Characteristics of rutile electrodes are:

•  They have a very smooth and stable arc and produce a relatively thinslag covering that is easy to remove

•  They give a smooth weld profile

•  They are regarded as the most user-friendly of the various electrodetypes

•  They have relatively high combined moisture content and because theycontain typically up to ~10% cellulose they cannot be baked andconsequently they do not give a low H weld deposit

•  Because of the risk of cracking they are not designed for welding of highstrength or thick section steel (although electrodes are manufactured in classes E60xx, E70xx, E80xx

the E60xx grade is by far the most commonly used)•  They do not give high toughness at low temperatures (typically only down

to about -20ºC)

The above listed characteristics mean that this type of electrode is used forgeneral-purpose fabrication of unalloyed, low strength steels in relativelythin sections (typically ≤ ~13mm).

3.1 Rutile electrode variants

By adding iron powder to the covering a range of thick-coated electrodeshave been produced in order to enhance productivity.

Such electrodes give weld deposits that weigh between ~135 and 190% oftheir core wire weight and so referred to as high recovery electrodes, ormore specifically for example a 170% recovery electrode.

The weld deposit from such electrodes can be relatively large and fluid andthis restricts welding to the flat position and for standing fillets for electrodeswith the highest recovery rates.

In all other respects these electrodes have the characteristics listed forstandard rutile electrodes.

4 Basic Electrodes

Basic electrodes are so named because the covering is made with a highproportion of basic minerals/compounds (alkaline compounds), such ascalcium carbonate (CaCO3), magnesium carbonate (MgCO3) and calciumfluoride (CaF2).

Page 173: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 173/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Welding Consumables

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010 

 A fully basic electrode covering will be made up with about 60% of thesebasic minerals/compounds.

Characteristics of basic electrodes are:

•  The basic slag that forms when the covering melts reacts with impurities,

such as sulphur and phosphorus, and also reduces the oxygen content ofthe weld metal by de-oxidation

•  The relatively clean weld metal that is deposited gives a very significantimprovement in weld metal toughness (C-Mn electrodes with Ni additionscan give good toughness down to -90°C)

•  They can be baked at relatively high temperatures without any of thecompounds present in the covering being destroyed, thereby giving lowmoisture content in the covering and low hydrogen levels in weld metal

•  In order to maintain the electrodes in a low hydrogen condition they needto be protected from moisture pick-up

  By means of baking before use (typically at ~350°C), transferring toa holding oven (typically at ~120°C) and issued in small quantitiesand/or using heated quivers (‘portable ovens’) at the work station(typically ~70°

  By use of vacuum packed electrodes that do not need to be re-baked before use

•  Basic slag is relatively viscous and thick which means that electrodemanipulation requires more skill and should be used with a short arc tominimise the risk of porosity

•  The surface profile of weld deposits from basic electrodes tends to beconvex and slag removal requires more effort

Metal powder electrodes  contain an addition of metal powder to the fluxcoating to increase the maximum permissible welding current level. Thus,for a given electrode size, the metal deposition rate and efficiency(percentage of the metal deposited) are increased compared with anelectrode containing no iron powder in the coating. The slag is normallyeasily removed. Iron powder electrodes are mainly used in the flat and H/Vpositions to take advantage of the higher deposition rates. Efficiencies ashigh as 130 to 140% can be achieved for rutile and basic electrodes withoutmarked deterioration of the arcing characteristics but the arc tends to beless forceful which reduces bead penetration.

4.1 Applications of basic electrodesBasic electrodes have to be used for all applications that require goodfracture toughness at temperatures below ~ -20°C.

To avoid the risk of hydrogen cracking basic electrodes have to be used forwelding hardenable steels (most C-Mn and all low alloy steels) and for moststeels when the joint thickness is greater than about 15mm.

Page 174: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 174/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Welding Consumables

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010 

5 Classification of Electrodes

National standards for electrodes that are used for welding are:

•  EN 499 - Covered electrodes for manual metal arc welding of non-alloyand fine grain steels

•  AWS A5.1 - Specification for carbon steel electrodes for shielded metalarc welding

•  AWS A5.5 - Specification for low-alloy steel electrodes for shielded metalarc welding

Electrode classification is based on tests specified by the standard on welddeposits made with each type of covered electrode. The standards requirechemical analysis and mechanical tests and electrode manufacturers tendto dual certify electrodes, wherever possible, to both the European and American standards

5.1 EN 499

EN 499 - Covered electrodes for manual metal arc welding of non-alloyand fine grain steels (see Figure 1)

This is the designation that manufacturers print on to each electrode so thatit can be easily identified. The classification is split into two sections:

Compulsory section - this includes the symbols for:

•  Type of product

•  Strength

•  Impact properties

•  Chemical composition•  Type of electrode covering

Optional section - this includes the symbols for:

•  Weld metal recovery

•  The type of current

•  The welding positions

•  The hydrogen content

The designation, compulsory  (strength, toughness and coating  including

any light alloying elements) must be identified on the electrode, however theoptional  (position, hydrogen levels etc are not mandatory and may not beshown on all electrodes.

Page 175: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 175/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Welding Consumables

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010 

Figure 1 The electrode classification system of EN 499.

5.2 AWS A5.1/5.1M: 2003

 AWS A5.1/5.1M: 2003 - Specification for carbon steel electrodes forshielded metal arc welding (see Figure 3)

Page 176: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 176/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Welding Consumables

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010 

This specification establishes the requirements for classification of coveredelectrodes with carbon steel cores for MMA welding. Requirements includemechanical properties of weld metal; weld metal soundness; and usability ofelectrodes. Requirements for chemical composition of the weld metal,moisture content of low hydrogen electrodes, standard sizes and lengths,marking, manufacturing and packaging are also included. A guide to the

use of the standard is given in an appendix. Optional supplementaryrequirements include improved toughness and ductility, lower moisturecontents and diffusible hydrogen limits.

The AWS classification system has mandatory and optional designators andrequires that both the mandatory classification designators and any optionaldesignators be printed on each electrode. The last two digits of themandatory part of the classification are used to designate the type ofelectrode coating/covering and examples of some of the more widely usedelectrodes are shown below.

 AWS A5.1

classification 

Tensile strength, N/mm2  Type of coating

E6010414

Cellulosic

E6011 Cellulosic

E6012 Rutile

E6013 Rutile

E7014482

Rutile, iron powder

E7015 Basic

E7016 Basic

E7018 Basic, iron powder

E7024 Rutile high recovery

Figure 2 Examples of some of the commonly used AWS A5.1 electrodes.

Figure 3 Mandatory c lassification designators

Designates: an electrode  Designates: the tensile strength(min.) in PSI of the weld metal Designates: The welding position thetype of coveringthe kind of current

Typical electrode to AWS A5.1

Page 177: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 177/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Welding Consumables

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010 

General descr ipt ion EN 499  AWS A5.1 / 5.5

Cellulos ic electrodes

(For vertical-down welding‘Stovepipe welding’of pipeline girth welds)

E 38 3 C 21

E 42 3 Z C 21

E 46 3 Z C 21

E 42 3 C 25

E 46 4 1Ni C 25

E6010

E7010-G

E8010-G

E7010-P 1 *

E8010-P 1 * 

* P = specially designated piping electrodes

Rutile electrodes

(For general purpose fabrication oflow strength steels – can be used forall positions except vertical-down) 

E 38 2 R 12

E 42 0 R 12

E6013

E6013

Heavy coated rutile electrodes

(Iron-powder electrodes)

(For higher productivity welding forgeneral fabrication of low strengthsteels – can generally only be usedfor downhand or standing filletwelding)

E 42 0 RR 13

E 42 0 RR 74

E6013

E7024

Basic electrodes

(For higher strength steels, thickersection steels where there is risk of Hcracking; for all applications requiringgood fracture toughness) 

E 42 2 B 12 H10

E 42 4 B 32 H5

E 46 6 Mn1Ni B 12 H5

E 55 6 Mn1Ni B 32 H5

E 46 5 1Ni B 45 H5*

E7016

E7018

E 7016-G

E8018-C1

E8018-G

E9018-G

E10018-G

* Vertical-down low H electrodes

Table 1 Common electrodes that are classif ied to BS EN 499 & AWS A5.1 / 5.5

Page 178: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 178/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Welding Consumables

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010 

6 TIG Filler Wires

Filler wires manufactured for TIG welding have compositions very similar tothose of base materials. However, they may contain very small additions ofelements that will combine with oxygen and nitrogen as a means ofscavenging any contaminants from the surface of the base material or from

the atmosphere.

For manual TIG, the wires are manufactured to the BS EN 440 and areprovided in 1m lengths (typically 1.2, 1.6, and 2.4mm diameter) and foridentification have flattened ends on which is stamped the wire designation(in accordance with a particular standard) and, for some grades, a batchnumber.

TIG consumable identification is stamped at the end of the wi re

For making precision root runs for pipe butt welds (particularly for automatedTIG welding) consumable inserts can be used that are made from materialthe same as the base material, or are compatible with it.

For small diameter pipe, the insert may be a ring but for larger diameter pipean insert of the appropriate diameter is made from shaped strip/wire,examples of which are shown below.

6.1 TIG shielding gases

Pure argon is the shielding gas that is used for most applications and is thepreferred gas for TIG welding of steel and gas flow rates are typically ~8 to12 litres/min for shielding.

Page 179: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 179/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Welding Consumables

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010 

The shielding gas not only protects the arc and weld pool but also is themedium required to establish a stable arc by being easy to ionise. A stablearc cannot be established in air and hence the welder would not be able toweld if the shielding gas were not switched on.

 Argon with a helium addition – typically ~30% may be used when a hotter

arc is needed such as when welding metals with high thermal conductivity,such as copper/copper alloys or thicker section aluminium/aluminium alloys.

There are some circumstances when special shielding gases are beneficial,for example:

 Ar + 3 to 5%H for austenitic stainless steels and Cu-Ni alloys Ar + ~3%N for duplex stainless steels

6.2 TIG back-purging

For most materials, the underside of a weld root bead needs to be protected

by an inert gas (a back-purge) – typically ~6-8 litres/min during welding.

For C steels and low alloy steels with total alloying additions ≤2.5% it maynot always be necessary to use a back-purge but for higher alloyed steelsand most other materials there may be excessive oxidation – and risk oflack of fusion if it is not used.

7 MIG/MAG Filler Wires

Solid filler wires manufactured for MIG/MAG generally have chemicalcompositions that have been formulated for particular base materials andthe wires have compositions similar to these base materials. Solid wires for

welding steels with active shielding gases are deoxidised with manganeseand silicon to avoid porosity. There may also be titanium and aluminiumadditions. Mild steel filler wires are available with different levels ofdeoxidants, known as double or triple de-oxidised wires. More highlydeoxidised wires are more expensive but are more tolerant of the platesurface condition, eg mill scale, surface rust, oil, paint and dust. There may,therefore, be a reduction in the amount of cleaning of the steel beforewelding.

These deoxidiser additions yield a small amount of glassy slag on thesurface of the weld deposit, commonly referred to as silica deposits. Thesesmall pockets of slag are easily removed with light brushing; but when

galvanising or painting after welding, it is necessary to use shot blasting.During welding, it is common practice to weld over these small islands sincethey do not represent a thick slag, and they usually spall off during thecontraction of the weld bead. However, when multipass welding, the slaglevel may build up to an unacceptable level causing weld defects andunreliable arc starting.

Page 180: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 180/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Welding Consumables

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010 

Steel wires usually have a flash coating of copper to improve current pick-upand to extend the shelf life of the wire. However, the copper coating cansometimes flake off and be drawn into the liner and wire feed mechanism,particularly if there is misalignment in the wire feed system. This may causeclogging and erratic wire feed. Uncoated wires are available as analternative, although electrical contact may not be as good as with copper-

coated wires, and contact tip operating temperatures may be higher.

Some typical Standards for specification of steel wire consumables are:

EN 440:  Welding consumables - Wire electrodes and deposits for gasshielded metal arc welding of non-alloy and fine grain steels - Classification.

EN 12534:  Welding consumables - Wire electrodes, wires, rods anddeposits for gas shielded metal arc welding of high strength steels -Classification.

Wire sizes are typically in the range 0.6-2.4mm diameter but the most

commonly used sizes are 0.8, 1.0, 1.2 and 1.6mm and provided on layerwound spools for consistent feeding.

Spools should be labelled to show the classification of the wire and its’diameter.

Flux-cored and metal-cored wires are also used extensively although theprocess is then referred to as FCAW  (flux-cored arc welding) and MCAW (metal cored arc welding)

7.1 MIG/MAG gas shielding

For non-ferrous metals and their alloys (such as Al, Ni and Cu) an inertshielding gas must be used. This is usually either pure argon or an argonrich gas with a helium addition.

The use of a fully inert gas is the reason why the process is also called MIG welding (metal inert gas) and for precise use of terminology this nameshould only be used when referring to the welding of non-ferrous metals

The addition of some helium to argon gives a more uniform heatconcentration within the arc plasma and this affects the shape of the weldbead profile

 Argon-helium mixtures effectively give a hotter arc and so they arebeneficial for welding thicker base materials those with higher thermalconductivity eg copper or aluminium.

Page 181: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 181/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Welding Consumables

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010 

For welding of steels – all grades, including stainless steels – there needs tobe a controlled addition of oxygen or carbon dioxide in order to generate astable arc and give good droplet wetting. Because these additions react withthe molten metal they are referred to as active gases and hence the nameMAG  welding (metal active gas) is the technical term that is use whenreferring to the welding of steels.

The percentage of carbon dioxide (CO2) or oxygen depends on the type ofsteel being welded and the mode of metal transfer being used – as indicatedbelow: -

•  100%CO2 For low carbon steel to give deeper penetration (Figure 4) and fasterwelding this gas promotes globular droplet transfer and gives high levelsof spatter and welding fume

•  Argon + 15 to 25%CO2 Widely used for carbon and some low alloy steels (and FCAW of

stainless steels)

•  Argon + 1 to 5%O2 Widely used for stainless steels and some low alloy steels

Figure 4 Effects of shielding gas composition on weld penetration and profile.

Page 182: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 182/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Welding Consumables

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010 

Figure 5 Active shielding gas mixtures for MAG welding of carbon,

carbon-manganese and low alloy steels.

Blue is a cooler gas mixture; red is a hotter mixture.

Gas mixtures - helium in place of argon gives a hotter arc, more fluid weldpool and better weld profile. These quaternary mixtures permit higherwelding speeds, but may not be suitable for thin sections.

7.1.1 Stainless steels

 Austenitic stainless steels are typically welded with argon-CO2/O2 mixturesfor spray transfer, or argon-helium-CO2 mixtures for all modes of transfer.The oxidising potential of the mixtures are kept to a minimum (2-2.5%

maximum CO2 content) in order to stabilise the arc, but with the minimumeffect on corrosion performance. Because austenitic steels have a highthermal conductivity, the addition of helium helps to avoid lack of fusiondefects and overcome the high heat dissipation into the material. Heliumadditions are up to 85%, compared with ~25% for mixtures used for carbonand low alloy steels. CO2  -containing mixtures are sometimes avoided toeliminate potential carbon pick-up.

Figure 6 Active shielding gas mixtures for MAG welding of stainless steels.

Blue is a cooler gas mixture; red is a hotter mixture.

Page 183: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 183/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Welding Consumables

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010 

For martensitic and duplex stainless steels, specialist advice should besought. Some Ar-He mixtures containing up to 2.5%N2  are available forwelding duplex stainless steels.

7.1.2 Light alloys, eg aluminium and magnesium, and copper and nickel andtheir alloys

Inert gases are used for light alloys and alloys that are sensitive to oxidation.Welding grade inert gases should be purchased rather than commercialpurity to ensure good weld quality.

 Argon: Argon can be used for aluminium because there is sufficient surface oxideavailable to stabilise the arc. For materials that are sensitive to oxygen, suchas titanium and nickel alloys, arc stability may be difficult to achieve withinert gases in some applications.

The density of argon is approximately 1.4 times that of air. Therefore, in the

downhand position, the relatively heavy argon is very effective at displacingair. A disadvantage is that when working in confined spaces, there is a riskof argon building up to dangerous levels and asphyxiating the welder.

 Argon-helium mixtures: Argon is most commonly used for MIG welding of light alloys, but someadvantage can be gained by the use of helium and argon/helium mixtures.Helium possesses a higher thermal conductivity than argon. The hotter weldpool produces improved penetration and/or an increase in welding speed.High helium contents give a deep broad penetration profile, but producehigh spatter levels. With less than 80% argon, a true spray transfer is notpossible. With globular-type transfer, the welder should use a 'buried' arc to

minimise spatter. Arc stability can be problematic in helium and argon-helium mixtures, since helium raises the arc voltage, and therefore there is alarger change in arc voltage with respect to arc length. Helium mixturesrequire higher flow rates than argon shielding in order to provide the samegas protection.

Page 184: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 184/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Welding Consumables

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010 

There is a reduced risk of lack of fusion defects when using argon-heliummixtures, particularly on thick section aluminium. Ar-He gas mixtures willoffset the high heat dissipation in material over about 3mm thickness.

Figure 7 Inert shielding gas mixtures for MIG welding of aluminium, magnesium,titanium, nickel and copper alloys.

Blue is a cooler gas mixture; red is a hotter mixture.

 A summary table of shielding gases and mixtures used for different basematerials is given in Table 2.

Page 185: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 185/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Welding Consumables

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010 

7.1.3 SUMMARY

MetalShieldinggas

Reactionbehaviour

Characteristics

Carbonsteel 

 Argon-CO2 

Slightlyoxidising

Increasing CO2 content gives hotter arc,improved arc stability, deeper penetration,

transition from 'finger'-type to bowl-shapedpenetration profile, more fluid weld poolgiving flatter weld bead with good wetting,increased spatter levels, better toughnessthan CO2. Min 80% argon for axial spraytransfer. General-purpose mixture:argon-10-15% CO2.

 Argon-O2 

Slightlyoxidising

Stiffer arc than Ar- CO2 mixtures, minimisesundercutting, suited to spray transfer mode,lower penetration than Ar-CO2 mixtures,'finger'-type weld bead penetration at highcurrent levels. General-purpose mixture:

argon-3% CO2. Argon-helium-CO2 

Slightlyoxidising

Substitution of helium for argon gives hotterarc, higher arc voltage, more fluid weld pool,flatter bead profile, more bowl-shaped anddeeper penetration profile and higher weldingspeeds, compared with Ar- CO2 mixtures.High cost.

CO2  Oxidising Arc voltages 2-3V higher than Ar-CO2 mixtures, best penetration, higher weldingspeeds, dip transfer or buried arc techniqueonly, narrow working range, high spatterlevels, low cost.

Stainlesssteels 

He-Ar-CO2 

Slightlyoxidising

Good arc stability with minimum effect oncorrosion resistance (carbon pickup), higherhelium contents designed for dip transfer,lower helium contents designed for pulse andspray transfer. General-purpose gas: Ar-40-60%He-2%CO2.

 Argon- O2  Slightlyoxidising

Spray transfer only, minimises undercuttingon heavier sections, good bead profile.

 Aluminium,copper,nickel,

titaniumalloys 

 Argon Inert Good arc stability, low spatter, and general-purpose gas. Titanium alloys require inertgas backing and trailing shields to prevent air

contamination. Argon-helium

Inert Higher heat input offsets high heatdissipation on thick sections, lower risk oflack of fusion defects, higher spatter, highercost than argon.

Table 2 Shielding gas mixtures for MIG/MAG welding - summary

Page 186: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 186/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Welding Consumables

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010 

8 SAW Filler Wires

Filler wires for SAW are made to AWS and EN standards and the mostcommonly used sizes are 2.4, 3.2, 4.0 and 5.0mm diameter and areavailable for welding a wide range of steels and some non-ferrousapplications, they have compositions similar to the base material but for

certification standards require flux/wire weld metal deposits to be made foranalysis and testing as required

8.1 SAW flux types

Fluxes can be categorised into two types, namely fused and agglomerated(agglomerated fluxes are sometimes called bonded fluxes – particularly inthe USA).

8.1.1 Fused flux

These types are manufactured by mixing certain suitable minerals/compounds, fusing them together, crushing the solid mass and then sieving

the crushed mass to recover granules within a particular size range.

Fused fluxes have the following characteristics/properties:

•  Contain a high proportion of silica (up to ~60%) and so the flux granuleshave similar in appearance to crushed glass – irregular shaped and hard- and have a smooth, and slightly shiny, surface

•  During re-circulation they have good resistance to breaking down into fineparticles – referred to as fines

•  Have very low moisture content as manufactured and do not absorbmoisture during exposure and so they should always give low hydrogenweld metal

•  Give welds beads with good surface finish and profile and de-slag easily

Page 187: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 187/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Welding Consumables

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010 

The main disadvantage of fused fluxes is that the compounds that give de-oxidation cannot be added so that welds have high oxygen content and sosteel weld metal does not have good toughness at sub-zero temperatures.

8.1.2 Agglomerated fluxThis is manufactured by mixing fine powdered minerals/compounds, addinga wet binder and further mixing to form flux granules of the required size.These are dried/baked to remove moisture, sieved and packaged in sealedcontainers to ensure they are in low hydrogen condition when supplied tothe user.

Some of the minerals/compounds used in these fluxes cannot be subjectedto the high temperatures required to make fused fluxes because they wouldbreak down and lose the properties that are needed during welding.

 Agglomerated fluxes have the following characteristics:

•  Granules tend to be more spherical and have a dull/matt finish

•  Granules are consist of fine powders, weakly held together, and so arequite soft and easily be broken down into fine powders during handling/re-circulation

•  Some of the compounds, and the binder itself, will tend to absorbmoisture from the atmosphere if left exposed and a controlled handlingprocedure* is essential

•  The slag is less fluid than those generated by fused fluxes and the weldbead profile tends to be more convex and more effort is required toremove the slag

*Agglomerated fluxes are similar to fluxes used for basic covered electrodesand susceptible to moisture pick-up when they are cold and left exposed.

 A typical controlled handling practice is to transfer flux from themanufacturer’s drum/bag to a heated silo (~120-150°C). This acts like theholding oven for basic electrodes.

Page 188: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 188/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Welding Consumables

Copyright © TWI Ltd 2010 

Warm flux is transferred to the flux hopper on the machine (usuallyunheated) and at the end of a shift or when there is to be an interruption inwelding, the hopper flux should be transferred to the silo.

The particular advantage of agglomerated fluxes is there ability to give weldmetals with low oxygen content and this enables steel weld metal to be

produced with good sub-zero toughness.

8.2 SAW flux basicity index

Fluxes are often referred to as having a certain basicity or basicity index(BI).

The BI indicates the flux formulation according to the ratio of basiccompounds to acid compounds and is used to give an indication of flux/weldreaction and can be interpreted as follows:

•  A flux with a BI = 1 has an equal ratio of basic and acid compounds andthus is neither basic nor acid but said to be neutral* 

•  A flux with BI >1 has basic characteristics; fully basic fluxes have BI of ~3to ~3.5

•  A flux with BI <1 has acid characteristics

•  Fused and agglomerated fluxes are mixed to produce fluxes referred toas semi-basic

* In the USA it is customary to use the terms neutral to indicate that the fluxhas no significant influence on the composition by transfer of elements fromflux to weld pool and active to indicate that the flux does transfer someelements

Fused fluxes have acid characteristics and agglomerated fluxes have basiccharacteristics.

 Although there are EN and AWS standards for flux classification, it iscommon UK practice to order fluxes by manufacturer name and use thisname on WPSs.

Page 189: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 189/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010MAG Welding

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010

1 The Process

Known in the USA as gas metal arc welding (GMAW). The MIG/MAGwelding process is a versatile technique suitable for both thin sheet andthick section components in most metallic materials. In the process, an arcis struck between the end of a wire electrode and the workpiece, melting

both to form a weld pool. The wire serves as the source of heat (via the arcat the wire tip) and filler metal for the joint. The wire is fed through a coppercontact tube (also called a contact tip) which conducts welding current intothe wire. The weld pool is protected from the surrounding atmosphere by ashielding gas fed through a nozzle surrounding the wire. Shielding gasselection depends on the material being welded and the application. Thewire is fed from a reel by a motor drive, and the welder or machine movesthe welding gun or torch along the joint line. The process offers highproductivity and is economical because the consumable wire is continuouslyfed. A diagram of the process is shown in Figure 1.

The MIG/MAG process uses semiautomatic, mechanised, or automatic

equipment. In semiautomatic welding, the wire feed rate and arc length arecontrolled automatically, but the travel speed and wire position are undermanual control. In mechanised welding, all parameters are under automaticcontrol, but they can be varied manually during welding, eg steering of thewelding head and adjustment of wire feed speed and arc voltage. Withautomatic equipment, there is no manual intervention during welding.Figure 1.1 shows equipment required for the MIG/MAG process.

Figure 1 MIG/MAG welding.

Page 190: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 190/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010MAG Welding

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010

Figure 1.1 MIG/MAG welding equipment.

 Advantages of the MIG/MAG process:

•  Continuous wire feed

•  Automatic self-regulation of the arc length

•  High deposition rate and minimal number of stop/start locations

•  High consumable efficiency

•  Heat inputs in the range 0.1-2.0kJ/mm

•  Low hydrogen potential process

•  Welder has good visibility of weld pool and joint line

•  Little or no post weld cleaning

•  Can be used in all positions (dip transfer)

•  Good process control possibilities

•  Wide range of application

1.1.1 Disadvantages

•  No independent control of filler addition•  Difficult to set up optimum parameters to minimise spatter levels

•  Risk of lack of fusion when using dip transfer on thicker weldments

•  High level of equipment maintenance

•  Lower heat input can lead to high hardness values

•  Higher equipment cost than MMA (manual metal arc) welding

•  Site welding requires special precautions to exclude draughts which maydisturb the gas shield

Page 191: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 191/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010MAG Welding

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010

•  Joint and part access is not as good as MMA or TIG welding

•  Cleanliness of base metal slag processes can tolerate greatercontamination.

2 Process Variables

The primary variables in MIG/MAG welding are:

•  Welding current/wire feed speed

•  Voltage

•  Gases

•  Travel speed and electrode orientation

•  Inductance

•  Contact tip to work distance

•  Nozzle to work distance

•  Shielding gas nozzle

•  Type of metal transfer

2.1 Welding current / wire feed speed

On MIG/MAG welding sets there is no control to set the welding current. Theelectrical characteristics of the welding set (flat or constant voltage type)automatically alters the welding current with changes to the set wire feedspeed to achieve a constant arc length.

Increasing the wire feed, and therefore current, increases wire burn-off,deposition rate and penetration.

Current type is almost always DC+ve, although some cored wires requireDC-ve for best results.

2.2 Voltage

This is set to achieve steady smooth welding conditions and is generallyincreased as the wire feed speed is increased.

Increase in voltage increases the width of the weld and reduces penetration.

2.3 Travel speed and electrode orientation

The faster the travel speed the less penetration, narrower bead width andthe higher risk of undercut 

Page 192: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 192/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010MAG Welding

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010

2.4 Effect of contact tip to workpiece distance (CTWD)

The CTWD has an influence over the welding current because of resistiveheating in the electrode extension (see Figure 4). The welding currentrequired to melt the electrode at the required rate (to match the wire feedspeed) reduces as the CTWD is increased. Long electrode extensions cancause lack of penetration, for example, in narrow gap joints, or with poormanipulation of the welding gun. Conversely, the welding current increaseswhen the CTWD is reduced.

• Increasing travel speed

• Reduced penetration and width,undercut

Figure 2 The effect of travel speed.

Penetration Deep Moderate ShallowExcess weld metal Maximum Moderate MinimumUndercut Severe Moderate Minimum  

Figure 3 The effect of torch angle.

Page 193: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 193/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010MAG Welding

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010

Figure 4 Contact tip to workpiece distance; electrode extension;and nozzle to workpiece distance.

The electrode extension should be checked when setting-up weldingconditions or when fitting a new contact tube. Normally measured from thecontact tube to the work piece (Figure 5) suggested CTWDs for the principalmetal transfer modes are:

Metal transfer mode  CTWD, mm 

Dip 10-15

Spray 20-25Pulse 15-20

Work iece 

Gas nozzle 

Contact t i

Electrodeextension 

Contact tip -to-workdistance  Arc len th

Contact tipsetback 

Nozzle-to-work(stand-off)distance 

Increased extension

Figure 5 The effect of increasing electrode extension.

Page 194: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 194/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010MAG Welding

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010

2.5 Effect of nozzle to work distance

Nozzle to work distance (see Figure 4) has a considerable effect on gasshielding efficiency; a decrease having the effect of stiffening the column.The nozzle to work distance is typically 12-15mm. If the CTWD issimultaneously reduced, however, the deposition rate at a given current is

decreased and visibility and accessibility are affected; so, in practice, acompromise is necessary. The following gives suggested settings for themode of metal transfer being used

Metal transfer mode Contact tip posit ion relative to nozzle

Dip 2mm inside to 2mm protruding

Spray 4-8mm inside

Spray (aluminium) 6-10mm inside

2.6 Shielding gas nozzle

The purpose of the shielding gas nozzle is to produce a laminar gas flow in

order to protect the weld pool from atmospheric contamination. Nozzle sizesrange from 13mm to 22mm diameter. The nozzle diameter should beincreased in relation to the size of the weld pool.

2.7 Types of metal transfer

Figure 6 Arc characteristic curve.

Page 195: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 195/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010MAG Welding

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010

1) Dip transfer:

Key characteristics:

•  Metal transfer by wire dipping or short circuiting into the weld pool

•  Relatively low heat input process

•  Low weld pool fluidity

•  Used for thin sheet metal above 0.8 and typically less than 3.2mm,positional welding of thicker section and root runs in open butt joints

•  Process stability and spatter can be a problem if poorly tuned

•  Lack of fusion risk if poorly set up and applied

•  Not used for non-ferrous metals and alloys

In dip transfer the wire short-circuits the arc between 50–200 times/sec. Thistype of transfer is normally achieved with CO2 or mixtures of CO2 and argongas + low amps and welding volts < 24V.

Figure 7 Dip transfer.

2) Spray transfer: 

Key characteristics:

•  Free-flight metal transfer

•  High heat input

•  High deposition rate

•  Smooth, stable arc

•  Used on steels above 6mm thickness and aluminium alloys above 3mmthickness

Spray transfer occurs at high currents and high voltages. Above thetransition current, metal transfer is in the form of a fine spray of smalldroplets, which are projected across the arc with low spatter levels. The highwelding current produces strong electromagnetic forces (known as the pincheffect' that cause the molten filament supporting the droplet to neck down.The droplets detach from the tip of the wire and accelerate across the arcgap.

With steels it can be used only in down-hand butts and H/V fillet welds, butgives significantly higher deposition rate, penetration and fusion than the diptransfer mode. With aluminum alloys it can be used in all positions.

Page 196: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 196/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010MAG Welding

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010

Figure 8 Spray transfer.

3) Pulsed transfer:

Key characteristics:

•  Free-flight droplet transfer without short-circuiting over the entire workingrange

•  Very low spatter

•  Lower heat input than spray transfer

•  Reduced risk of lack of fusion compared with dip transfer

•  Control of weld bead profile for dynamically loaded parts

•  Process control/flexibility

•  Enables use of larger diameter, less expensive wires with thinner plates -more

•  Easily fed (a particular advantage for aluminium welding)

Pulsing the welding current extends the range of spray transfer operationwell below the natural transition from dip to spray transfer. This allowssmooth, spatter-free spray transfer to be obtained at mean currents belowthe transition level, eg 50-150A and at lower heat inputs.

 A typical pulse waveform and the main pulse welding variables are shown inFigure 9.  Pulse transfer uses pulses of current to fire a single globule ofmetal across the arc gap at a frequency between 50–300 pulses/sec. Pulsetransfer is a development of spray transfer that gives positional weldingcapability for steels, combined with controlled heat input, good fusion, and

high productivity. It may be used for all sheet steel thickness >1mm, but ismainly used for positional welding of steels >6mm.

Page 197: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 197/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010MAG Welding

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010

Figure 9 Pulsed welding waveform and parameters.

4) Globular transfer:

Key characteristics:

•  Irregular metal transfer

•  Medium heat input

•  Medium deposition rate

•  Risk of spatter

•  Not widely used in the UK; can be used for mechanised welding ofmedium

•  Thickness steels (typically 3-6mm) in the flat (PA) position

The globular transfer range occupies the transitional range of arc voltage

between free flight and fully short-circuiting transfer. Irregular droplettransfer and arc instability are inherent, particularly when operating near thetransition threshold. In globular transfer, a molten droplet of several timesthe electrode diameter forms on the wire tip. Gravity eventually detaches theglobule when its weight overcomes surface tension forces, and transfertakes place often with excessive spatter

To minimise spatter levels, it is common to operate with a very short arclength, and in some cases a buried arc technique is adopted. Globulartransfer can only be used in the flat position and is often associated withlack of penetration, fusion defects and uneven weld beads, because of theirregular transfer and tendency for arc wander.

Page 198: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 198/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010MAG Welding

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010

2.8 Inductance

What does inductance do?When MIG welding in the dip transfer mode, the welding electrode touchesthe weld pool, causing a short circuit. During the short circuit, the arc voltageis nearly zero. If the constant voltage power supply responded instantly,

very high current would immediately begin to flow through the weldingcircuit. The rapid rise in current to a high value would melt the short-circuitedelectrode free with explosive force, dispelling the weld metal and causingconsiderable spatter.

Inductance is the property in an electrical circuit that slows down the rate ofcurrent rise (Figure 10). The current travelling through an inductance coilcreates a magnetic field. This magnetic field creates a current in the weldingcircuit that is in opposition to the welding current. Increasing the inductancewill also increase the arc time and decrease the frequency of short-circuiting.

For each electrode feed rate, there is an optimum value of inductance. Toolittle inductance results in excessive spatter. If too much inductance is used,the current will not rise fast enough and the molten tip of the electrode is notheated sufficiently causing the electrode to stub into the base metal. Modernelectronic power sources automatically set the inductance to give a smootharc and metal transfer.

Figure 10 Relationship between inductance and current rise.

Page 199: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 199/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010MAG Welding

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010

3 Welding Consumables

3.1 Solid wires

Usually made in sizes from 0.6 to 1,6mm diameter they are produced withan analysis which essentially matches the materials being joined. Additionalelements are often added especially extra de-oxidants in steel wires. C-Mnand low alloy steel wires are usually copper coated to reduce the risk ofrusting and promote better electrical contact.

3.2 Flux cored wires

 A cored wire consists of a metal sheath containing a granular flux. This fluxcan contain elements that would normally be used in MMA electrodes andso the process has a very wide range of applications.

In addition we can also add gas producing elements and compounds to theflux and so the process can become independent of a separate gas shield,which restricted the use of conventional MIG/MAG welding in many fieldapplications.

Most wires are sealed mechanically and hermetically with various forms of joint. The effectiveness of the joint of the wire is an inspection point of coredwire welding as moisture can easily be absorbed into a damaged or poorseam.

Wire types commonly used are:

•  Rutile – which give good positional capabilities.

•  Basic – also positional but good on “dirty” material

  Metal cored  – higher productivity and some having excellent root runcapabilities.

•  Self-shielded – no external gas needed.

Baking of cored wires is ineffective and will do nothing to restore thecondition of a contaminated flux within a wire.

Note that unlike MMA electrodes the potential hydrogen levels andmechanical properties of welds with rutile wires can equal those of the basictypes.

Page 200: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 200/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010MAG Welding

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010

4 Important Inspection Points/Checks When MIG/MAGWelding

1 The welding equipment A visual check should be made to ensure the welding equipment is in goodcondition.

2 The eectrode wireThe diameter, specification and the quality of the wire are the maininspection headings. The level of de-oxidation of the wire is an importantfactor with single, double and triple de-oxidised wires being available.

The higher the level of de-oxidants in the wire, then the lower the chance ofporosity in the weld. The quality of the wire winding, copper coating, andtemper are also important factors in minimising wire feed problems.

Quality of wire windings and increasing costs

(a) Random wound. (b) Layer wound. (c) Precision layer  wound.

3 The drive rolls and liner.Check the drive rolls are of the correct size for the wire and that thepressure is only hand tight, or just sufficient to drive the wire. Any excesspressure will deform the wire to an ovular shape. This will make the wirevery difficult to drive through the liner and result in arcing in the contact tipand excessive wear of the contact tip and liner.

Check that the liner is the correct type and size for the wire. A size of linerwill generally fit 2 sizes of wire ie (0.6 and 0.8) (1.0 and 1.2) (1.4 and 1.6)mm diameter. Steel liners are used for steel wires and Teflon liners foraluminium wires.

4 The contact tipCheck that the contact tip is the correct size for the wire being driven, andcheck the amount of wear frequently. Any loss of contact between the wireand contact tip will reduce the efficiency of current pick. Most steel wires arecopper-coated to maximise the transfer of current by contact between 2copper surfaces at the contact tip, this also inhibits corrosion. The contacttip should be replaced regularly.

5 The connections

The length of the electric arc in MIG/MAG welding is controlled by thevoltage settings. This is achieved by using a constant voltage volt/ampcharacteristic inside the equipment. Any poor connection in the weldingcircuit will affect the nature and stability of the electric arc, and is thus is amajor inspection point.

Page 201: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 201/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010MAG Welding

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010

6 Gas and gas flow rateThe type of gas used is extremely important to MIG/MAG welding, as is theflow rate from the cylinder, which must be adequate to give good coverageover the solidifying and molten metal to avoid oxidation and porosity.

7 Other variable welding parameters

Checks should be made for correct wire feed speed, voltage, speed oftravel, and all other essential variables of the process given on the approvedwelding procedure.

8 Safety checksChecks should be made on the current carrying capacity, or duty cycle ofequipment and electrical insulation. Correct extraction systems should be inuse to avoid exposure to ozone and fumes.

 A check should always be made to ensure that the welder is quali fiedto weld the procedure being employed.

Typical welding imperfections:

1 Silica inclusions, (on ferritic steels only) caused by poor inter-runcleaning.

2 Lack of sidewall fusion  during dip transfer welding thick sectionvertically down.

3 Porosity  caused from loss of gas shield and low tolerance tocontaminants

4 Burn-through  from using the incorrect metal transfer mode on sheetmetal

Page 202: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 202/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010MMA Welding

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010

1 Manual Metal-Arc/Shielded Metal Arc Welding(MMA/SMAW)

The most versatile of the welding processes, manual metal arc (MMA)welding is suitable for welding most ferrous and non-ferrous metals, over awide range of thicknesses. The MMA welding process can be used in all

positions, with reasonable ease of use and relatively economically. The finalweld quality is primarily dependent on the skill of the welder.

When an arc is struck between the coated electrode and the workpiece,both the electrode and workpiece surface melt to form a weld pool. Theaverage temperature of the arc is approximately 6000°C, which is sufficientto simultaneously melt the parent metal, consumable core wire and the fluxcoating. The flux forms gas and slag, which protects the weld pool fromoxygen and nitrogen in the surrounding atmosphere. The molten slagsolidifies and cools and must be chipped off the weld bead once the weldrun is complete (or before the next weld pass is deposited). The processallows only short lengths of weld to be produced before a new electrode

needs to be inserted in the holder.

The manual metal arc welding process.

Page 203: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 203/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010MMA Welding

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010

2 MMA Welding Basic Equipment Requirements

1 Power source transformer/rectifier  (constant current type) 2 Holding oven (holds at temperatures up to 150°C) 3 Inverter power source (more compact and portable) 4 Electrode holder  (of a suitable amperage rating) 5 Power cable (of a suitable amperage rating) 6 Welding visor  (with correct rating for the amperage/process) 7 Power return cable (of a suitable amperage rating) 8 Electrodes (of a suitable type and amperage rating) 9 Electrode oven (bakes electrodes at up to 350°C) 10Control panel (on\off/amperage/polarity/OCV) 

1

2

10

56

4

38

9

7

Page 204: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 204/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010MMA Welding

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010

3 Power Requirements

Manual metal arc welding can be carried out using either direct (DC) oralternating (AC) current. With DC welding current either positive (+ve) ornegative (-ve) polarity can be used, so current is flowing in one direction. ACwelding current flows from negative to positive, and is two directional.

Power sources for MMA welding are transformers (which transforms mains AC to AC suitable for welding), transformer-rectifiers (which rectifies AC toDC), diesel or petrol driven generators (preferred for site work) or inverters(a more recent addition to welding power sources). For MMA welding apower source with a constant current (drooping) output characteristic mustbe used.

The power source must provide:

•  An open circuit voltage (OCV) to initiate the arc, between 50 and 90V

•  Welding voltage to maintain the arc during welding, between 20 and

30V.•  A suitable current range, typically 30-350A.

•  A stable arc. Rapid arc recovery or arc re-ignition without current surge.

•  A constant welding current. The arc length may change during welding,but consistent electrode burn-off rate and weld penetration characteristicsmust be maintained during welding.

4 Welding Variables

Other factors, or welding variables, which affect the final quality of the MMAweld, are:

Current (amperage)Voltage affects heat InputTravel speed

PolarityType of electrode

4.1 Current (amperage)

 Amperage controls burn-off rate and depth of penetration. Welding currentlevel is determined by the size of electrode and the welding position -manufacturers recommend the normal operating range and current

Incorrect amperage settings when using MMA can contribute to thefollowing:

 Amperage too low: Poor fusion or penetration, irregular weld beadshape, slag inclusion unstable arc, porosity,potential arc strikes, difficult starting.

Page 205: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 205/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010MMA Welding

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010

 Amperage too high: Excessive penetration, burn-through, undercut,spatter, porosity, deep craters, electrode damagedue to overheating, high deposition makingpositional welding difficult.

4.2 Voltage

Open circuit voltage (OCV) is the voltage measured between the outputterminals of the power source when no current is flowing through thewelding circuit.

For safety reasons this should not exceed 100V, and is usually between50-90V.

 Arc voltage is the voltage required to maintain the arc during welding and isusually between 20–30V. As arc voltage is a function of arc length thewelder controls the arc length and therefore the arc voltage.

 Arc voltage controls weld pool fluidity.

The effects of having the wrong arc voltage can be:

 Arc Voltage too low: Poor penetration, electrode stubbing, lack offusion defects, potential for arc strikes, slaginclusion, unstable arc condition, irregular weldbead shape.

 Arc voltage too high: Excessive spatter, porosity, arc wander, irregularweld bead shape, slag inclusions, fluid weld poolmaking positional welding difficult. 

4.3 Travel speed

Travel speed is related to whether the welding is progressed by stringerbeads or by weaving. Often the run out length (ROL) ie the length of depositfrom one standard electrode is quoted on procedures rather than speed as itis easier for the welder to visualise.

Travel speed too fast: Narrow thin weld bead, fast cooling, slaginclusions, undercut, poor fusion/penetration

Travel speed too slow: Cold lap, excess weld deposition, irregular beadshape, undercut.

Page 206: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 206/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010MMA Welding

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010

4.4 Type of current and polarity

Polarity will determine the distribution of heat energy at the welding arc. Thepreferred polarity of the MMA system depends primarily upon the electrodebeing used and the desired properties of the weld.

•  Direct current. electrode posi tive (DCEP / DC+).Usually produces the greatest penetration but with lesser deposition rate.Known in some standards as reverse polarity

•  Direct current. electrode negative (DCEN / DC-)Usually produces less penetration with greater deposition rate.Known in some standards as straight polarity

When using direct current the arc can be affected by arc blow. Thedeflection of the arc from its normal path due to magnetic forces. 

•   Al ternat ing current (AC)

The distribution of heat energy at the arc is equal.

•  Operating factor  (O/F)The percentage (%) of arc on time in a given time span.

When compared with semi automatic welding processes the MMA weldingprocess has a low O/F of approximately 30% Manual semi-automaticMIG/MAG O/F is in the region 60% with fully automated MIG/MAG in theregion of 90% O/F. A welding process O/F  can be directly linked toproductivity.

Operating Factor should not to be confused  with the term duty cycle,

which is a safety value given as the % of time a conductor can carry acurrent and is given as a specific current at 60 and 100% of 10 minutes ie350A 60% and 300A 100%.

5 Type of Consumable Electrode

For MMA welding there are three generic types of flux covering:

Rutile, basic, cellulos ic. The details of these types are covered elsewherein these notes.

Page 207: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 207/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010MMA Welding

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010

6 Typical Welding Defects

1 Slag inclusions  caused by poor welding technique or insufficient inter-run cleaning.

2 Porosity  from using damp or damaged electrodes or when welding

contaminated or unclean material.

3 Lack of root fusion or penetration caused by in-correct settings of theamps, root gap or face width.

4 Undercut  caused by too high amperage for the position or by a poorwelding technique eg travel speed too fast or too slow, arc length(therefore voltage) variations particularly during excessive weaving.

5  Arc st rikes  caused by incorrect arc striking procedure, or lack of skill.These may be also caused by incorrectly fitted/secured power return leadclamps.

6 Hydrogen cracks  caused by the use of incorrect electrode type orincorrect baking procedure and/or control of basic coated electrodes.

Page 208: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 208/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Submerged Arc

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010

1 The Process

 Abbreviated as SAW, this is a welding process where an arc is struckbetween a continuous bare wire and the parent plate. The arc, electrodeend and the molten pool are submerged in an agglomerated or fusedpowdered flux, which turns, into a gas and slag in its lower layers when

subjected to the heat of the arc, thus protecting the weld fromcontamination. The wire electrode is fed continuously by a feed unit ofmotor-driven rollers, which usually are voltage-controlled to ensure an arc ofconstant length. The flux is fed from a hopper fixed to the welding head, anda tube from the hopper spreads the flux in a continuous elongated mound infront of the arc along the line of the intended weld and of sufficient depth tosubmerge the arc completely so that there is no spatter, the weld is shieldedfrom the atmosphere, and there are no ultraviolet or infra-red radiationeffects (see below). Unmelted flux is reclaimed for use. The use ofpowdered flux restricts the process to the flat and horizontal-vertical weldingpositions.

Submerged arc welding is noted for its ability to employ high weld currentsowing to the properties and functions of the flux. Such currents give deep

penetration and high deposition rates. Generally a DC electrode positivepolarity is employed up to about 1000A because it produces a deeppenetration. On some applications (ie cladding operations) DC electrodenegative is needed to reduce penetration and dilution. At higher currents orin case of multiple electrode systems, AC is often preferred to avoid theproblem of arc blow (when used with multiple electrode systems, DCelectrode positive is used for the lead arc and AC is used for the trail arc).

Page 209: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 209/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Submerged Arc

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010

Power sources can be of the constant current or constant voltage type eithermay have outputs exceeding 1000A.

Difficulties sometimes arise in ensuring conformity of the weld with apredetermined line owing to the obscuring effect of the flux. Where possible,a guide wheel to run in the joint preparation is positioned in front of thewelding head and flux hoppers.

Submerged arc welding is widely used in the fabrication of ships, pressurevessels, linepipe, railway carriages and anywhere where long welds arerequired. It can be used to weld thicknesses from 1.5mm upwards.

Materials joined

•  Welding of carbon steels.

•  Welding low alloy steels (eg fine grained and creep resisting).

•  Welding stainless steels.

•  Welding nickel alloys.

•  Cladding to base metals to improve wear and corrosion resistance.

2 Process variables

There are several variables which when changed can have an effect on theweld appearance and mechanical properties:

1 Welding current2 Type of flux and particle distribution3 Arc voltage4 Travel speed5 Electrode size6 Electrode extension7 Type of electrode8 Width and depth of the layer of flux9 Electrode angle, (leading, trailing)10 Polarity

11 Single-, double- or multi-wire system

Page 210: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 210/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Submerged Arc

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010

2.1 Welding current

Welding current effect on weld profile (2.4mm electrode diameter, 35V arcvoltage and 61cm/min travel speed)

•  Excessively high current produces a deep penetrating arc with a

tendency to burn-through, undercut or a high, narrow bead prone tosolidification cracking

•  Excessively low current produces an unstable arc, lack of penetrationand possibly lack of fusion

2.2 Arc voltage

 Arc voltage adjustment varies the length of the arc between the electrodeand the molten weld metal. If the arc voltage increases, the arc lengthincreases and vice versa. The voltage principally determines the shape ofthe weld bead cross section and its external appearance.

25V 35V 45V

 Arc voltage effect on weld profile (2.4mm electrode diameter, 500A weldingcurrent and 61cm/min travel speed)

Increasing the arc voltage will:

•  Produce a flatter and wider bead

•  Increase flux consumption

•  Tend to reduce porosity caused by rust or scale on steel

•  Help to bridge excessive root opening when fit-up is poor•  Increase pick-up of alloying elements from the flux when they are

present

350A 500A 650 A

Page 211: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 211/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Submerged Arc

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010

Excessively high arc voltage will:

•  Produce a wide bead shape that is subject to solidification cracking

•  Make slag removal difficult in groove welds

•  Produce a concave shaped fillet weld that may be subject to cracking

•  Increase undercut along the edge(s) of fillet welds

•  Over-alloy the weld metal, via the flux

Reducing the arc voltage with constant current and travel speed will:

•  Produce a stiffer arc which improves penetration in a deep weld grooveand resists arc blow.

Excessively low arc voltage will:

•  Produce a high, narrow bead

•  Causes difficult slag removal along the weld toes

2.3 Travel speedIf the travel speed is increased:

•  Heat input per unit length of weld is decreased

•  Less filler metal is applied per unit length of weld, and consequently lessexcess weld metal

•  Penetration decreases and thus the weld bead becomes smaller

30cm/min 61cm/min 122cm/min

Travel speed effect on weld profile (2.4mm electrode diameter, 500Awelding current and 35V arc voltage)

Page 212: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 212/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Submerged Arc

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010

2.4 Electrode size

Electrode size affects:

•  The weld bead shape and the depth of penetration at a given current: ahigh current density results in a stiff arc that penetrates into the basemetal. Conversely, a lower current density in the same size electroderesults in a soft arc that is less penetrating.

•  The deposition rate: at any given amperage setting, a small diameterelectrode will have a higher current density and a higher deposition rateof molten metal than a larger diameter electrode. However, a largerdiameter electrode can carry more current than a smaller electrode, sothe larger electrode can ultimately produce a higher deposition rate athigher amperage. 

Electrode size effect on weld profile (600A welding current, 30V arc voltageand 76cm/min travel speed).

2.5 Electrode extension

The electrode extension is the distance the continuous electrode protrudesbeyond the contact tip. At high current densities, resistance heating of theelectrode between the contact tip and the arc can be utilised to increase theelectrode melting rate (as much as 25-50%). The longer the extension, thegreater the amount of heating and the higher the melting rate (see below).

3.2 mm 4.0 mm 5.0 mm

Page 213: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 213/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Submerged Arc

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010

2.6 Type of electrode

 An electrode with a low electrical conductivity, such as stainless steel, canwith a normal electrode extension experience greater resistance heating.Thus for the same size electrode and current, the melting rate of a stainlesssteel electrode will be higher than that of a carbon steel electrode.

2.7 Width and depth of flux

The width and depth of the layer of granular flux influence the appearanceand soundness of the finished weld as well as the welding action. If thegranular layer is too deep, the arc is too confined and a rough weld with arope-like appearance is likely to result, it may also produce local flat areason the surface often referred to as gas flats. The gases generated duringwelding cannot readily escape, and the surface of the molten weld metal isirregularly distorted. If the granular layer is too shallow, the arc will not beentirely submerged in flux. Flashing and spattering will occur. The weld willhave a poor appearance, and it may show porosity.

3 Storage and Care of Consumables

Care must be given to fluxes supplied for SAW which, although they may bedry when packaged, may be exposed to high humidity during storage. Insuch cases they should be stored in accordance with the manufacturer'srecommendations before use, or porosity or cracking may result. It rarelypractical or economical to re-dry fluxes which may have picked up moisture.

Ferrous wire coils supplied as continuous feeding electrodes are usuallycopper-coated. This provides some corrosion resistance, ensures goodelectrical contacts and helps in smooth feeding. Rust and mechanicaldamage should be avoided in such products, as they will both interrupt

smooth feeding of the electrode. Rust will be detrimental to weld qualitygenerally since rust is a hygroscopic material (may contain or absorbmoisture) and thus it can lead to hydrogen induced cracking.

Contamination by carbon containing materials such as oil, grease, paint anddrawing lubricants is especially harmful with ferrous metals. Carbon pick-upin the weld metal can cause a marked and usually undesirable change inproperties. Such contaminants may also result in hydrogen being absorbedin the weld pool.

Welders should always follow the manufacturer's recommendations forconsumables storage and handling

Page 214: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 214/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010TIG Welding

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010

1 Process Characteristics

In the USA the TIG process is also called gas tungsten arc welding (GTAW).TIG welding is a process where melting is produced by heating with an arcstruck between a non-consumable tungsten electrode and the workpiece.

 An inert gas is used to shield the electrode and weld zone to preventoxidation of the tungsten electrode and atmospheric contamination of theweld and hot filler wire (as shown below).

Manual TIG welding.

Tungsten is used because it has a melting point of 3370°C, which is wellabove any other common metal.

The power source is of the constant current type.

Page 215: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 215/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010TIG Welding

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010

2 Process Variables

The main variables in TIG welding are:

•  Welding current

•  Current type and polarity

•  Travel speed•  Shape of tungsten electrode tip and vertex angle

•  Shielding gas flow rate

Each of these variables is considered in more detail in the following sub-sections.

2.1 Welding current

•  Weld penetration is directly related to welding current.

•  If the welding current is too low, the electrode tip will not be properlyheated and an unstable arc may result.

•  If the welding current is set too high, the electrode tip might overheat andmelt, leading to tungsten inclusions.

2.2 Current type and polarity

•  With steels DC electrode negative is used.

•  Materials which have refractory oxides such as those of aluminium ormagnesium are welded using AC or DC electrode positive which breakup the oxide layer.

•  With a DC positively connected electrode, heat is concentrated at theelectrode tip and therefore for DC positive welding the electrode needsto be of greater diameter than when using DC negative if overheating of

the tungsten is to be avoided. A water-cooled torch is recommended ifDC positive is used.

•  The current carrying capacity of a DC positive electrode is about onetenth that of a negative one and it is therefore limited to welding thinsections.

2.3 Travel speed

•  Travel speed affects both weld width and penetration but the effect onwidth is more pronounced than on penetration.

•  Increasing the travel speed reduces the penetration and width

•  Reducing the travel speed increases the penetration and width

Page 216: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 216/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010TIG Welding

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010

2.4 Tungsten electrode types

Different types of tungsten electrodes can be used to suit differentapplications:

•  Pure tungsten electrodes are rarely used.

•  Thoriated electrodes  are alloyed with thorium oxide, typically 2%, toimprove arc initiation. They have higher current carrying capacity thanpure tungsten electrodes and maintain a sharp tip for longer.

Unfortunately, thoria is slightly radioactive (emitting α  radiation) and thedust generated during tip grinding should not be inhaled. Electrodegrinding machines used for thoriated tungsten grinding should be fittedwith a dust extraction system.

•  Ceriated and lanthaniated electrodes  are alloyed with cerium andlanthanum oxides, for the same reason as thoriated electrodes. Theyoperate successfully with DC or AC but since cerium and lanthanum arenot radioactive, these types have been used as replacements forthoriated electrodes

•  Zirconiated electrodes  are alloyed with zirconium oxide. Operatingcharacteristics of these electrodes fall between the thoriated types andpure tungsten. However, since they are able to retain a balled end duringwelding, they are recommended for AC welding. Also, they have a highresistance to contamination and so they are used for high integrity weldswhere tungsten inclusions must be avoided.

Page 217: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 217/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010TIG Welding

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010

2.5 Shape of tungsten electrode tip

•  With DC electrode negative, thoriated, ceriated or lanthanated tungstenelectrodes are used with the end is ground to a specific angle (theelectrode tip angle or vertex angle – shown below).

•  As a general rule, the length of the ground portion of the tip of the

electrode should have a length equal to approximately 2 to 2.5 times theelectrode diameter.

•  The tip of the electrode is ground flat to minimise the risk of the tipbreaking off when the arc is initiated or during welding (shown below).

•  If the vertex angle is increased, the penetration increases.

•  If the vertex angle is decreased, bead width increases.

•  For AC welding, pure or zirconiated tungsten electrodes are used.

•  These are used with a hemispherical (‘balled’) end (as shown below).

•  In order to produce a balled end the electrode is grounded, an arcinitiated and the current increased until it melts the tip of the electrode.

Electrode tip angle Electrode tip with Electrode tip with a(or vertex angle) with flat end balled end

3 Filler Wires and Shielding Gases

These are selected on the basis of the materials being welded. See therelevant chapter in these notes.

Page 218: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 218/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010TIG Welding

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010

4 Tungsten Inclusions

Small fragments of tungsten that enter a weld will always show up onradiographs (because of the relatively high density of this metal) and formost applications will not be acceptable.

Thermal shock to the tungsten causing small fragments to enter the weldpool is a common cause of tungsten inclusions and is the reason whymodern power sources have a current slope-up device to minimise this risk.

This device allows the current to rise to the set value over a short period andso the tungsten is heated more slowly and gently.

5 Crater Cracking

Crater cracking is one form of solidification cracking and some filler metalscan be sensitive to it.

Modern power sources have a current slope-out device so that at the end ofa weld when the welder switches off the current it reduces gradually and theweld pool gets smaller and shallower.

This means that the weld pool has a more favourable shape when it finallysolidifies and crater cracking can be avoided. 

6 Common Applications of the TIG Process

These include autogenous welding of longitudinal seams, in thin walledpipes and tubes, in stainless steel and other alloys, on continuous formingmills.

Using filler wires, TIG is used for making high quality joints in heavier gaugepipe and tubing for the chemical, petroleum and power generatingindustries.

It is also in the aerospace industry for such items as airframes and rocketmotor cases.

Page 219: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 219/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010TIG Welding

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010

7 Advantages of the TIG Process

•  It produces superior quality welds, with very low levels of diffusiblehydrogen and so there is less danger of cold cracking.

•  It does not give weld spatter nor slag inclusions which makes itparticularly suitable for applications that require a high degree of

cleanliness (eg pipework for the food and drinks industry, semi-conductors manufacturing, etc).

•  It can be used with filler metal and on thin sections without filler; it canproduce welds at relatively high speed.

•  It enables welding variables to be accurately controlled and is particularlygood for controlling weld root penetration in all positions of welding.

•  It can be used to weld almost all weldable metals, including dissimilar joints, but is not generally used for those with low melting points such aslead and tin. The method is especially useful in welding the reactivemetals with very stable oxides such as aluminium, magnesium, titaniumand zirconium.

•  The heat source and filler metal additions are controlled independentlyand thus it is very good for joining thin base metals.

8 Disadvantages of the TIG Process

•  It gives low deposition rates compared with other arc welding processes.

•  There is a need for higher dexterity and welder co-ordination than withMIG/MAG or MMA welding.

•  It is less economical than MMA or MIG/MAG for sections thicker than~10mm.

•  It is difficult to fully shield the weld zone in draughty conditions and somay not be suitable for site/field welding

•  Tungsten inclusions can occur if the electrode is allowed to contact theweld pool.

•  The process does not have any cleaning action and so has low tolerancefor contaminants on filler or base metals.

Page 220: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 220/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Weld Imperfections

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010

1 Definit ions (see BS EN ISO 6520-1)

Imperfection: Any deviation from the ideal weld.Defect: An unacceptable imperfection.

Classification of imperfections according to BS EN ISO 6520-1:

This standard classifies the geometric imperfections in the case of fusionwelding, dividing them into six groups:

1 Cracks2 Cavities3 Solid inclusions4 Lack of fusion and penetration5 Imperfect shape and dimension6 Miscellaneous imperfections

It is important that an imperfection is correctly identified thus allowing for thecause to be identified and actions taken to prevent further occurrence.

2 Cracks

Definition: An imperfection produced by a local rupture in the solid state,which may arise from the effect of cooling or stresses. Cracks are moresignificant than other types of imperfection, as their geometry produces avery large stress concentration at the crack tip, making them more likely tocause fracture.

Types of crack:

•  Longitudinal

•  Transverse•  Radiating (cracks radiating from a common point)

•  Crater

•  Branching (a group of connected cracks originating from a commoncrack)

These cracks can be situated in the:

•  Weld metal

•  HAZ

•  Parent metal

Exception: Crater cracks are found only in the weld metal.

Page 221: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 221/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Weld Imperfections

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010

Depending on their nature, these cracks can be:

•  Hot cracks (ie solidification cracks liquation cracks)

•  Precipitation induced cracks (ie reheat cracks, present in creep resistingsteels)

•  Cold cracks (ie hydrogen induced cracks)

•  Lamellar tearing

2.1 Hot cracks

Depending on their location and mode of occurrence, hot cracks can be:

•  Solidification cracks: occur in the weld metal (usually along the centrelineof the weld) as a result of the solidification process

•  Liquation cracks: occur in the coarse grain HAZ, in the near vicinity ofthe fusion line as a result of heating the material to an elevatedtemperature, high enough to produce liquation of the low melting pointconstituents placed on grain boundaries.

2.2 Solidification cracks

Generally, solidification cracking can occur when:

•  Weld metal has a high carbon or impurity (sulphur etc) element content

•  Depth-to-width ratio of the solidifying weld bead is large (deep andnarrow)

•  Disruption of the heat flow condition occurs, eg stop/start condition

The cracks can be wide and open to the surface like shrinkage voids orsub-surface and possibly narrow.

Solidification cracking is most likely to occur in compositions, which result ina wide freezing temperature range. In steels this is commonly created by ahigher than normal content of carbon and impurity elements such as sulphur

Page 222: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 222/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Weld Imperfections

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010

and phosphorus. These elements segregate during solidification, so thatintergranular liquid films remain after the bulk of the weld has solidified. Thethermal shrinkage of the cooling weld bead can cause these to rupture andform a crack.

It is important that the welding fabricator does not weld on or near metalsurfaces covered with scale or which have been contaminated with oil orgrease. Scale can have high sulphur content, and oil and grease can supplyboth carbon and sulphur. Contamination with low melting point metals suchas copper, tin, lead, and zinc should also be avoided.

2.3 Hydrogen induced cracks

Root (underbead) crack. Toe crack.

Hydrogen induced cracking occurs primarily in the grain-coarsened region ofthe HAZ, and is also known as cold cracking, delayed cracking orunderbead/toe cracking. Underbead cracking lies parallel to the fusionboundary, and its path is usually a combination of intergranular andtransgranular cracking. The direction of the principal residual tensile stresscan, for toe cracks, cause the crack path to grow progressively away from

Page 223: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 223/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Weld Imperfections

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010

the fusion boundary towards a region of lower sensitivity to hydrogencracking, when this happens, the crack growth rate decreases andeventually arrests.

 A combination of four factors is necessary to cause HAZ hydrogen cracking:

1 Hydrogen level > 15ml/100g of weld metal deposited2 Stress > 0.5 of the yield stress3 Temperature < 3000C4 Susceptible microstructure > 400HV hardness

If any one factor is not satisfied, cracking is prevented. Therefore, crackingcan be avoided through control of one or more of these factors.

•  Apply preheat (to slow down the cooling rate and thus avoid theformation of susceptible microstructures)

•  Maintain a specific interpass temperature (same effect as preheat)

•  Post heat on completion of welding (to reduce the hydrogen content byallowing hydrogen to effuse from the weld area)

•  Apply PWHT (to reduce residual stress and eliminate susceptiblemicrostructures)

•  Reduce weld metal hydrogen by proper selection of welding process/consumable (eg use TIG welding instead MMA, use basic coveredelectrodes instead cellulose ones)

•  Use multi-run instead single-run technique (eliminate susceptiblemicrostructures by means of self tempering effect, reduce the hydrogencontent by allowing hydrogen to effuse from the weld area)

•  Use a temper bead or hot pass technique (same effect as above)

•  Use austenitic or nickel filler (avoid susceptible microstructure formation

and allow hydrogen diffusion out of critical areas)•  Use dry shielding gases (reduce hydrogen content)

•  Clean joint from rust (avoid hydrogen contamination from moisturepresent in the rust)

•  Reduce residual stress

•  Blend the weld profile (reduce stress concentration at the toes of theweld)

Page 224: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 224/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Weld Imperfections

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010

2.4 Lamellar tearing

Lamellar tearing occurs only in rolled steel products (primarily plates) and its

main distinguishing feature is that the cracking has a terraced appearance.

Cracking occurs in joints where:

•  A thermal contraction strain occurs in the through-thickness direction ofsteel plate

•  Non-metallic inclusions are present as very thin platelets, with theirprincipal planes parallel to the plate surface

Contraction strain imposed on the planar non-metallic inclusions results inprogressive decohesion to form the roughly rectangular holes which are thehorizontal parts of the cracking, parallel to the plate surface. With furtherstrain, the vertical parts of the cracking are produced, generally by ductileshear cracking. These two stages create the terraced appearance of thesecracks.

Two main options are available to control the problem in welded joints liableto lamellar tearing:

Page 225: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 225/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Weld Imperfections

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010

•  Use a clean steel with guaranteed through-thickness properties (Zgrade) a combination of joint design, restraint control and weldingsequence to

•  Minimise the risk of cracking.

3 Cavities

Cavity

Shrinkage cavity:caused by shrinkageduring solidification

Gas cavity: formedby entrapped gas

Gas pore

Uniformlydistributed porosity

Clustered(localised) porosity

Linear porosity

Elongated cavity

Worm-hole

Surface pore

Interdendriticmicroshrinkage

Transgranularmicroshrinkage

Interdendriticshrinkage

Crater pipe

Microshrinkage

Page 226: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 226/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Weld Imperfections

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010

3.1 Gas pore

Description:  A gas cavity of essentially spherical shape trapped within the

weld metal.

This gas cavity can be present in various forms:

•  Isolated

•  Uniformly distributed porosity

•  Clustered (localised) porosity

•  Linear porosity

•  Elongated cavity

•  Surface pore

Causes PreventionDamp fluxes/corroded electrode (MMA) Use dry electrodes in good

condition

Grease/hydrocarbon/watercontamination of prepared surface

Clean prepared surface

 Air entrapment in gas shield (MIG/MAGTIG)

Check hose connections

Incorrect/insufficient deoxidant inelectrode, filler or parent metal

Use electrode with sufficientdeoxidation activity

Too high an arc voltage or arc length Reduce voltage and arc length

Gas evolution from primingpaints/surface treatment

Identify risk of reaction beforesurface treatment is applied

Too high a shielding gas flow rate whichresults in turbulence (MIG/MAG TIG)

Optimise gas flow rate

Comments:  Note that porosity can either be localised or finely dispersedvoids throughout the weld metal.

Page 227: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 227/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Weld Imperfections

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010

3.2 Worm holes

Description: Elongated or tubular cavities formed by entrapped gas duringthe solidification of the weld metal; they can occur singly or in groups.

Causes Prevention

Gross contamination ofpreparation surface

Introduce preweld cleaningprocedures

Laminated work surface Replace parent material with anunlaminated piece

Crevices in work surface due to joint geometry

Eliminate joint shapes which producecrevices

Comments: Wormholes are caused by the progressive entrapment of gasbetween the solidifying metal crystals (dendrites) producing characteristic

elongated pores of circular cross-section. These elongated pores canappear as a herring-bone array on a radiograph. Some of them may breakthe surface of the weld.

Page 228: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 228/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Weld Imperfections

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010

3.3 Surface porosity

Description: A gas pore that breaks the surface of the weld.

Causes Prevention

Damp or contaminated surface orelectrode

Clean surface and dry electrodes

Low fluxing activity (MIG/MAG) Use a high activity flux

Excess sulphur (particularly free-cutting steels) producing sulphurdioxide

Use high manganese electrode toproduce MnS, note free-cuttingsteels (high sulphur) should notnormally be welded

Loss of shielding gas due to longarc or high breezes (MIG/MAG)

Improve screening against draughtsand reduce arc length

Too high a shielding gas flow ratewhich results in turbulence

(MIG/MAG TIG)

Optimise gas flow rate

Comments: The origins of surface porosity are similar to those for uniformporosity.

Page 229: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 229/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Weld Imperfections

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010

3.4 Crater pipe

Description:  A shrinkage cavity at the end of a weld run. The main cause isshrinkage during solidification.

Causes Prevention

Lack of welder skill due to usingprocesses with too high a current

Retrain welder

Inoperative crater filler (slope out)(TIG)

Use correct crater filling techniques

 

Comments: Crater filling is a particular problem in TIG welding due to itslow heat input. To fill the crater for this process it is necessary to reduce theweld current (slope out) in a series of descending steps until the arc isextinguished.

4 Solid InclusionsDefinition: Solid foreign substances entrapped in the weld metal.

Solidinclusion

Oxide

inclusionMetallicinclusion

Fluxinclusion

Slaginclusion

ClusteredIsolatedLinear Other

Tungsten

Copper

Page 230: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 230/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Weld Imperfections

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010

4.1 Slag inclusions

Description: Slag trapped during welding. The imperfection is of anirregular shape and thus differs in appearance from a gas pore.

Causes PreventionIncomplete slag removal fromunderlying surface of multipassweld

Improve inter-run slag removal

Slag flooding ahead of arc Position work to gain control of slag.Welder needs to correct electrodeangle

Entrapment of slag in work surface Dress work surface smooth

Comments:  A fine dispersion of inclusions may be present within the weldmetal, particularly if the MMA process is used. These only become a

problem when large or sharp-edged inclusions are produced.

Page 231: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 231/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Weld Imperfections

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010

4.2 Flux inclusions

Description: Flux trapped during welding. The imperfection is of an irregularshape and thus differs in appearance from a gas pore. Appear only in caseof flux associated welding processes (ie MMA, SAW and FCAW).

Causes Prevention

Unfused flux due to damagedcoating

Use electrodes in good condition

Flux fails to melt and becomestrapped in the weld (SAW orFCAW)

Change the flux/wire. Adjust weldingparameters ie current, voltage etc toproduce satisfactory welding conditions

4.3 Oxide inclusions

Description: Oxides trapped during welding. The imperfection is of anirregular shape and thus differs in appearance from a gas pore.

Causes PreventionHeavy mill scale/rust on worksurface

Grind surface prior to welding

Comments:  A special type of oxide inclusion is puckering. This type ofdefect occurs especially in the case of aluminium alloys. Gross oxide filmenfoldment can occur due to a combination of unsatisfactory protection fromatmospheric contamination and turbulence in the weld pool.

Page 232: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 232/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Weld Imperfections

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010

4.4 Tungsten inclusions

Description:  Particles of tungsten can become embedded during TIGwelding. This imperfection appears as a light area on radiographs due to thefact that tungsten is denser than the surrounding metal and absorbs largeramounts of X/gamma radiation.

Causes Prevention

Contact of electrode tip with weld pool Keep tungsten out of weld pool;use HF start

Contact of filler metal with hot tip ofelectrode

 Avoid contact between electrodeand filler metal

Contamination of the electrode tip byspatter from the weld pool

Reduce welding current; adjustshielding gas flow rate

Exceeding the current limit for a givenelectrode size or type

Reduce welding current; replaceelectrode with a larger diameterone

Extension of electrode beyond thenormal distance from the collet,resulting in overheating of theelectrode

Reduce electrode extensionand/or welding current

Inadequate tightening of the collet Tighten the collet

Inadequate shielding gas flow rate orexcessive wind draughts resulting inoxidation of the electrode tip

 Adjust the shielding gas flow rate;protect the weld area; ensure thatthe post gas flow after stopping thearc continues for at least5 seconds

Splits or cracks in the electrode Change the electrode, ensure thecorrect size tungsten is selected

for the given welding current usedInadequate shielding gas (eg use ofargon-oxygen or argon-carbon dioxidemixtures that are used for MAGwelding)

Change to correct gas composition

Page 233: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 233/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Weld Imperfections

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010

5 Lack of Fusion and Penetration

5.1 Lack of fusion

Definition: Lack of union between the weld metal and the parent metal orbetween the successive layers of weld metal.

Lack offusion

Lack of sidewallfusion

Lack of inter-runfusion

Lack of rootfusion

Page 234: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 234/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Weld Imperfections

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010

5.1.1 Lack of sidewall fusion

Description: Lack of union between the weld and parent metal at one orboth sides of the weld.

Causes Prevention

Low heat input to weld Increase arc voltage and/or weldingcurrent; decrease travel speed

Molten metal flooding ahead ofarc

Improve electrode angle and workposition; increase travel speed

Oxide or scale on weldpreparation

Improve edge preparation procedure

Excessive inductance in MAG diptransfer welding

Reduce inductance, even if thisincreases spatter

Comments: During welding sufficient heat must be available at the edge ofthe weld pool to produce fusion with the parent metal.

Page 235: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 235/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Weld Imperfections

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010

5.1.2 Lack of inter-run fusion

Description: A lack of union along the fusion line, between the weld beads.

Causes Prevention

Low arc current resulting in low fluidity of weldpool

Increase current

Too high a travel speed Reduce travel speed

Inaccurate bead placement Retrain welder

Comments: Lack of inter-run fusion produce crevices between the weldbeads and cause local entrapment of slag.

Page 236: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 236/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Weld Imperfections

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010

5.1.3 Lack of root fusion

Description: Lack of fusion between the weld and parent metal at the rootof a weld.

Causes Prevention

Low heat input Increase welding current and/or arc

voltage; decrease travel speedExcessive inductance in MAG diptransfer welding,

Use correct induction setting for theparent metal thickness

MMA electrode too large (lowcurrent density)

Reduce electrode size

Use of vertical down welding Switch to vertical up procedure

Large root face Reduce root face

Small root gap Ensure correct root opening

Incorrect angle or incorrectelectrode manipulation

Use correct electrode angle. Ensurewelder is fully qualified and competent

Excessive misalignment at root Ensure correct alignment

5.2 Lack of penetration

Lack ofpenetration

Incompletepenetration

Incomplete rootpenetration

Page 237: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 237/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Weld Imperfections

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010

5.2.1 Incomplete penetration

Description: The difference between the actual and nominal penetration.

Causes Prevention

Excessively thick root face,insufficient root gap or failure tocut back to sound metal in a backgouging operation

Improve back gouging technique andensure the edge preparation is as perapproved WPS

Low heat input Increase welding current and/or arcvoltage; decrease travel speed

Excessive inductance in MAG dip

transfer welding, pool floodingahead of arc

Improve electrical settings and possibly

switch to spray arc transfer

MMA electrode too large (lowcurrent density)

Reduce electrode size

Use of vertical down welding Switch to vertical up procedure

Comments: If the weld joint is not of a critical nature, ie the requiredstrength is low and the area is not prone to fatigue cracking, it is possible toproduce a partial penetration weld. In this case incomplete root penetrationis considered part of this structure and is not an imperfection (this wouldnormally be determined by the design or code requirement).

Page 238: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 238/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Weld Imperfections

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010

5.2.2 Incomplete root penetration

Description: One or both fusion faces of the root are not melted. Whenexamined from the root side, you can clearly see one or both of the rootedges unmelted.

Causes and prevention: Same as for lack of root fusion.

Page 239: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 239/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Weld Imperfections

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010

6 Imperfect Shape and Dimensions

6.1 Undercut

Description:  An irregular groove at the toe of a run in the parent metal or ina previously deposited weld metal due to welding. It is characterised by itsdepth, length and sharpness.

Causes Prevention

Melting of top edge due to highwelding current (especially at freeedge) or high travel speed

Reduce power input, especiallyapproaching a free edge whereoverheating can occur

 Attempting a fillet weld in horizontalvertical position (PB) with leg length>9mm

Weld in the flat position or usemultirun techniques

Excessive/incorrect weaving Reduce weaving width or switch tomultiruns

Incorrect electrode angle Direct arc towards thicker member

Incorrect shielding gas selection(MAG)

Ensure correct gas mixture formaterial type and thickness (MAG)

Comments: Care must be taken during weld repairs of undercut to controlthe heat input. If the bead of a repair weld is too small, the cooling ratefollowing welding will be excessive and the parent metal may have anincreased hardness and the weld may be susceptible to hydrogen cracking.

Undercut

Continuousundercut

Intermittentundercut

Inter runundercut

Page 240: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 240/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Weld Imperfections

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010

6.2 Excess weld metal

Description: Excess weld metal is the extra metal that produces excessiveconvexity in fillet welds and a weld thickness greater than the parent metalplate in butt welds. This feature of a weld is regarded as an imperfectiononly when the height of the excess weld metal is greater than a specifiedlimit.

Causes Prevention

Excess arc energy (MAG,SAW)

Reduction of heat input

Shallow edge preparation Deepen edge preparation

Faulty electrode manipulationor build-up sequence

Improve welder skill

Incorrect electrode size Reduce electrode sizeToo slow a travel speed Ensure correct travel speed is used

Incorrect electrode angle Ensure correct electrode angle is used

Wrong polarity used (electrodepolarity DC-VE (MMA, SAW )

Ensure correct polarity ie DC +VENote DC-VE must be used for TIG

Comments: The term “reinforcement” used to designate this feature of theweld is misleading since the excess metal does not normally produce astronger weld in a butt joint in ordinary steel. This imperfection can becomea problem, as the angle of the weld toe can be sharp, leading to anincreased stress concentration at the toes of the weld and fatigue cracking.

Page 241: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 241/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Weld Imperfections

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010

6.3 Excess penetration

Description: Projection of the root penetration bead beyond a specified limitcan be local or continuous.

Causes Prevention

Weld heat input too high Reduce arc voltage and/or weldingcurrent; increase welding speed

Incorrect weld preparation ieexcessive root gap, thin edgepreparation, lack of backing

Improve workpiece preparation

Use of electrode unsuited towelding position

Use correct electrode for position

Lack of welder skill Retrain welder

Comments: Note that the maintenance of a penetration bead havinguniform dimensions requires a great deal of skill, particularly in pipe buttwelding. This can be made more difficult if there is restricted access to theweld or a narrow preparation. The use of permanent or temporary backingbars can be used to assist in the control of penetration.

Page 242: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 242/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Weld Imperfections

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010

6.4 Overlap

Description:  An imperfection at the toe of a weld caused by metal flowingon to the surface of the parent metal without fusing to it.

Causes Prevention

Poor electrode manipulation(MMA)

Retrain welder

High heat input/low travel speedcausing surface flow of fillet welds

Reduce heat input or limit leg size to9mm maximum leg size for single passfillets.

Incorrect positioning of weld Change to flat position

Wrong electrode coating typeresulting in too high a fluidity

Change electrode coating type to amore suitable fast freezing type whichis less fluid

Comments: For a fillet weld overlap is often associated with undercut, as ifthe weld pool is too fluid the top of the weld will flow away to produceundercut at the top and overlap at the base. If the volume of the weld pool istoo large in case of a fillet weld in horizontal-vertical position (PB), weldmetal will collapse due to gravity, producing both defects (undercut at thetop and overlap at the base). This defect is called sagging.

Page 243: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 243/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Weld Imperfections

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010

6.5 Linear misalignment

Description: Misalignment between two welded pieces such that while theirsurface planes are parallel, they are not in the required same plane.

Causes Prevention

Inaccuracies in assemblyprocedures or distortion fromother welds

 Adequate checking of alignment prior towelding coupled with the use of clampsand wedges

Excessive out of flatness in hotrolled plates or sections

Check accuracy of rolled section prior towelding

Comments: Misalignment is not really a weld imperfection, but a structuralpreparation problem. Even a small amount of misalignment can drasticallyincrease the local shear stress at a joint and induce bending stress.

Page 244: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 244/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Weld Imperfections

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010

6.6 Angular distortion

Description: Misalignment between two welded pieces such that theirsurface planes are not parallel or at the intended angle.

Causes and prevention: Same as for linear misalignment.

6.7 Incompletely filled groove

Description:  A continuous or intermittent channel in the surface of a welddue to insufficient deposition of weld filler metal.

Causes Prevention

Insufficient weld metal Increase the number of weld runs

Irregular weld bead surface Retrain welder

Comments: This imperfection differs from undercut, as incompletely filledgroove reduces the load bearing capacity of a weld, whereas undercutproduces a sharp stress-raising notch at the edge of a weld.

Page 245: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 245/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Weld Imperfections

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010

6.8 Irregular width

Description: Excessive variation in width of the weld.

Causes Prevention

Severe arc blow Switch from DC to AC, keep an as shortas possible arc length

Irregular weld bead surface Retrain welder 

 Comments:  Although this imperfection may not affect the integrity ofcompleted weld, it can affect the width of HAZ and reduce the load-carryingcapacity of the joint (in case of fine-grained structural steels) or impaircorrosion resistance (in case of duplex stainless steels).

Page 246: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 246/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Weld Imperfections

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010

6.9 Root concavity

Description:  A shallow groove that occurs due to shrinkage at the root of a

butt weld.

Causes Prevention

Insufficient arc power to producepositive bead

Raise arc energy

Incorrect prep/fit-up Work to WPS

Excessive backing gas pressure(TIG)

Reduce gas pressure

Lack of welder skill Retrain welder

Slag flooding in backing bar groove Tilt work to prevent slag flooding

Comments: The use of a backing strip can be used to control the extent ofthe root bead.

Page 247: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 247/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Weld Imperfections

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010

6.10 Burn through

Description: A collapse of the weld pool resulting in a hole in the weld.

Causes Prevention

Insufficient travel speed Increase the travel speed

Excessive welding current Reduce welding current

Lack of welder skill Retrain welder

Excessive grinding of root face More care taken, retrain welder

Excessive root gap Ensure correct fit up

Comments: This is a gross imperfection, which occurs basically due to lackof welder skill. It can be repaired by bridging the gap formed into the joint,but requires a great deal of attention.

Page 248: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 248/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Weld Imperfections

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010

7 Miscellaneous Imperfections

7.1 Stray arc

Description:  Local damage to the surface of the parent metal adjacent tothe weld, resulting from arcing or striking the arc outside the weld groove.The result is in form of random areas of fused metal where the electrode,the holder, or current return clamp has accidentally touched the work.

Causes Prevention

Poor access to the work Improve access (modify assemblysequence)

Missing insulation on electrodeholder or torch

Institute a regular inspection schemefor electrode holders and torches

Failure to provide an insulatedresting place for the electrodeholder or torch when not in use

Provide an insulated resting place

Loose current return clamp Regularly maintain current returnclamps

 Adjusting wire feed (MAG welding)without isolating welding current

Retrain welder

Comments:  An arc strike can produce a hard HAZ, which may containcracks. These can lead to serious cracking in service. It is better to removean arc strike by grinding than weld repair.

Page 249: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 249/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Weld Imperfections

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010

7.2 Spatter

Description: Globules of weld metal or filler metal expelled during weldingand adhering to the surface of parent metal or solidified weld metal.

Causes Prevention

High arc current Reduce arc current

Long arc length Reduce Arc Length

Magnetic arc blow Reduce arc length or switch to ACpower

Incorrect settings for GMAWprocess

Modify electrical settings (but becareful to maintain full fusion!)

Damp electrodes Use dry electrodes

Wrong selection of shielding gas(100% CO2)

Increase argon content if possible,however too high a % of argon maylead to lack of penetration

Comments: Spatter in itself is a cosmetic imperfection and does not affectthe integrity of the weld. However as it is usually caused by an excessivewelding current, it is a sign that the welding conditions are not ideal and sothere are usually other associated problems within the structure ie high heatinput. Note that some spatter is always produced by open arc consumableelectrode welding processes. Anti-spatter compounds can be used on theparent metal to reduce sticking and the spatter can then be scraped off.

Page 250: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 250/302

Page 251: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 251/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Weld Imperfections

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010

8 Acceptance Standards

Weld imperfections can seriously reduce the integrity of a welded structure.Therefore, prior to service of a welded joint, it is necessary to locate themusing NDE techniques, assess their significance, and take action to avoidtheir re-occurrence.

The acceptance of a certain size and type of defect for a given structure isnormally expressed as the defect acceptance standard. This is usuallyincorporated in application standards or specifications.

 All normal weld imperfection acceptance standards totally reject cracks.However, in exceptional circumstances, and subject to the agreement of allparties, cracks may be allowed to remain if it can be demonstrated beyonddoubt that they will not lead to failure. This can be difficult to establish andusually involves fracture mechanics measurements and calculations.

It is important to note that the levels of acceptability vary between different

applications, and in most cases vary between different standards for thesame application. Consequently, when inspecting different jobs it isimportant to use the applicable standard or specification quoted in thecontract.

Once unacceptable weld imperfections have been found, they have to beremoved. If the weld imperfection is at the surface, the first consideration iswhether it is of a type, which is normally shallow enough to be repaired bysuperficial dressing. Superficial implies that, after removal of the defect, theremaining material thickness is sufficient not to require the addition of furtherweld metal.

If the defect is too deep, it must be removed by some means and new weldmetal added to ensure a minimum design throat thickness.

Replacing removed metal or weld repair (as in filling an excavation or re-making a weld joint) has to be done in accordance with an approvedprocedure. The rigor with which this procedure is qualified will depend onthe application standard for the job. In some cases it will be acceptable touse a procedure qualified for making new joints whether filling an excavationor making a complete joint. If the level of reassurance required is higher, thequalification will have to be made using an exact simulation of a welded joint, which is excavated and then refilled using a specified method. In eithercase, qualification inspection and testing will be required in accordance with

the application standard.

Page 252: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 252/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Weld Repairs

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010 

Weld repairs can be divided into two specific areas:

1 Production repairs2 In service repairs

The reasons for making a repair are many and varied. Typically, they range

from the removal of weld defects induced during manufacture to a quick andtemporary running-repair to an item of production plant. In these terms, thesubject of welding repairs is also wide and varied and often confused withmaintenance and refurbishment where the work can be scheduled.

With planned maintenance and refurbishment, sufficient time can be allowedto enable the tasks to be completed without production pressures beingapplied. In contrast, repairs are usually unplanned and may result inshortcuts being taken to allow the production programme to continue. It is,therefore, advisable for a fabricator to have an established policy on repairsand to have repair methods and procedures in place.

The manually controlled welding processes are the easiest to use,particularly if it is a local repair or one to be carried out on-site. Probably themost frequently used of these processes is manual metal arc (MMA) as thisis versatile, portable and readily applicable to many alloys because of thewide range of off-the-shelf consumables. Repairs almost always result inhigher residual stresses and increased distortion compared with first timewelds. With carbon-manganese and low/medium alloy steels, the applicationof preheat and post-weld heat treatments may be required.

There are a number of key factors that need to be considered beforeundertaking any repair.

The most important being a judgement as to whether it is financiallyworthwhile. Before this judgement can be made, the fabricator needs toanswer the following questions:

1 Can structural integrity be achieved if the item is repaired?2 Are there any alternatives to welding?3 What caused the defect and is it likely to happen again?4 How is the defect to be removed and what welding process is to be

used?5 Which non-destructive testing (NDT) is required to ensure complete

removal of the defect?

6 Will the welding procedures require approval/re-approval?7 What will be the effect of welding distortion and residual stress?8 Will heat treatment be required?9 What NDT is required and how can acceptability of the repair be

demonstrated?10 Will approval of the repair be required - if yes, how and by whom?

Page 253: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 253/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Weld Repairs

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010 

 Although a weld repair may be a relatively straightforward activity, in manyinstances it can be quite complex and various engineering disciplines mayneed to be involved to ensure a successful outcome.

It is recommended that there be an ongoing analysis of the types of defectcarried out by the Q/C department to discover the likely reason for their

occurrence, (Material/process or skill related.)

In general terms, a welding repair involves:

1 A detailed assessment to find out the extremity of the defect. Thismay involve the use of a surface or sub-surface NDT methods.

2 Cleaning the repair area, (removal of paint grease etc)3 Once established the excavation site must be clearly identified and

marked out.4 An excavation procedure may be required (method used ie grinding,

arc-air gouging, preheat requirements etc).5 NDT should be used to locate the defect and confirm its removal.

6 A welding repair procedure/method statement with the appropriate*welding process, consumable, technique, controlled heat input andinterpass temperatures etc will need to be approved.

7 Use of approved welders.8 Dressing the weld and final visual.9 NDT procedure/technique prepared and carried out to ensure that the

defect has been successfully removed and repaired.10 Any post repair heat treatment requirements.11 Final NDT procedure/technique prepared and carried out after heat

treatment requirements.12 Applying protective treatments (painting etc as required).

(*Appropriate’ means suitable for the alloys being repaired and may notapply in specific situations)

1 Production Repairs

Repairs are usually identified during production inspection and evaluation ofthe reports is usually carried out by the Welding Inspector, or NDT operator.Discontinuities in the welds are only classed as defects when they areoutside the permitted range permitted by the applied code or standard.

Before the repair can commence, a number of elements need to be fulfilled:

 Analysis

 As this defect is surface breaking and has occurred at the fusion face theproblem could be cracking or lack of sidewall fusion. If the defect is found tobe cracking the cause may be associated with the material or the weldingprocedure, however if the defect is lack of sidewall fusion this can beapportioned to the lack of skill of the welder. 

Page 254: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 254/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Weld Repairs

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010 

 Assessment

In this particular case as the defect is open to the surface, magnetic particleinspection (MPI) or dye penetrant inspection (DPI) may be used to gaugethe length of the defect and ultrasonic testing (U/T) used to gauge the depth.

 A typical defect is shown below:

Excavation

If a thermal method of excavation is being used ie arc-air gouging it may bea requirement to qualify a procedure as the heat generated may have anaffect on the metallurgical structure, resulting in the risk of cracking in theweld or parent material

Plan view of defect

Page 255: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 255/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Weld Repairs

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010 

To prevent cracking it may be necessary to apply a preheat.

The depth to width ratio shall not be less than 1 (depth) to 1 (width) ideally 1to 1.5 would be recommended (ratio: depth 1 to the width 1.5).

Side view of excavation for sl ight sub surface defect

D

W

Side view of excavation for deep defect

D

W

Side view of excavation for full root repair

Page 256: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 256/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Weld Repairs

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010 

Cleaning of the excavation  

 At this stage grinding of the repair area is important, due to the risk ofcarbon becoming impregnated into the weld metal/parent material.

It should be ground back typically 3 to 4mm to bright metal.

Confirmation of excavation 

 At this stage NDT should be used to confirm that the defect has beencompletely excavated from the area.

Page 257: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 257/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Weld Repairs

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010 

Re-welding of the excavation

Prior to re-welding of the excavation a detailed repair welding procedure/method statement shall be approved.

NDT confirmation of successful repair

 After the excavation has been filled the weldment should then undergo acomplete retest using the same NDT techniques as previously used toestablish the original repair, this is carried out to ensure no further defectshave been introduced by the repair welding process. NDT may also need tobe further applied after any additional post-weld heat treatment has beencarried out.

2 In-Service Repairs

Most in-service repairs can be of a very complex nature, as the componentis very likely to be in a different welding position and condition than it wasduring production. It may also have been in contact with toxic or combustiblefluids hence a permit to work will need to be sought prior to any work beingcarried out. The repair welding procedure may look very different to theoriginal production procedure due to changes in these elements.

Other factors may also be taken into consideration, such as the effect ofheat on any surrounding areas of the component ie electrical components,or materials that may become damaged by the repair procedure. This mayalso include difficulty in carrying out any required pre- or post-welding heattreatments and a possible restriction of access to the area to be repaired.For large fabrications it is likely that the repair must also take place on-site

and without a shut down of operations, which may bring other elements thatneed to be considered.

Repair of in service defects may require consideration of these and manyother factors, and as such are generally considered more complicated thanproduction repairs.

Typical side view of weld repair

Page 258: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 258/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Weld Repairs

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010 

Joining technologies often play a vital role in the repair and maintenance ofstructures. Parts can be replaced, worn or corroded parts can be built up,and cracks can be repaired.

When a repair is required it is important to determine two things: firstly, thereason for failure and, secondly, can the component actually be repaired?

The latter point infers that the material type is known. For metals,particularly those to be welded, the chemical composition is vitally important.Failure modes often indicate the approach required to make a sound repair.When the cause-effect analysis, however simple, is not followed through it isoften the case that the repair is unsafe - sometimes disastrously so.

In many instances, the Standard or Code used to design the structure willdefine the type of repair that can be carried out and will also give guidanceon the methods to be followed. Standards imply that when designing ormanufacturing a new product it is important to consider a maintenanceregime and repair procedures. Repairs may be required during manufactureand this situation should also be considered.

Normally, there is more than one way of making a repair. For example,cracks in cast iron might be held together or repaired by: pinning, bolting,riveting, welding, or brazing. The method chosen will depend on factorssuch as the reason for the failure, the material composition and cleanliness,the environment and the size and shape of the component.

It is very important  that repair and maintenance welding are not regardedas activities, which are simple or straightforward. In many instances a repairmay seem undemanding but the consequences of getting it wrong can becatastrophic failure with disastrous consequences.

Is welding the best method of repair?If repair is called for because a component has a local irregularity or ashallow defect, grinding out any defects and blending to a smooth contourmight well be acceptable. It will certainly be preferable if the steel has poorweldability or if fatigue loading is severe. It is often better to reduce the so-called factor of safety slightly, than to risk putting defects, stressconcentrations and residual stresses into a brittle material.

In fact brittle materials - which can include some steels (particularly in thicksections) as well as cast irons - may not be able to withstand the residualstresses imposed by heavy weld repairs, particularly if defects are not allremoved, leaving stress concentrations to initiate cracking.

Is the repair really like earlier repairs?

Repairs of one sort may have been routine for many years. It is important,however, to check that the next one is not subtly different. For example, thesection thickness may be greater; the steel to be repaired may be differentand less weldable, or the restraint higher. If there is any doubt, answer theremaining questions.

Page 259: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 259/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Weld Repairs

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010 

What is the composition and weldability of the base metal?

The original drawings will usually give some idea of the steel involved,although the specification limits may then have been less stringent, and thespecification may not give enough compositional details to be helpful. Ifsulphur-bearing free-machining steel is involved, it could give hot crackingproblems during welding.

If there is any doubt about the composition, a chemical analysis should becarried out. It is important to analyse for all elements, which may affectweldability (Ni, Cr, Mo, Cu, V, Nb and B) as well as those usually, specified(C, S, P, Si and Mn).

 A small cost spent on analysis could prevent a valuable component beingruined by ill-prepared repairs or, save money by reducing or avoiding theneed for preheat if the composition were leaner than expected. Once thecomposition is known, a welding procedure can be devised

What strength is required from the repair?The higher the yield strength of the repair weld metal, the greater will be theresidual stress level on completion of welding, the greater the risk ofcracking, the greater the clamping needed to avoid distortion and moredifficulty in formulating the welding procedure. In any case, the practical limitfor the yield strength of conventional steel weld metals is about 1000N/mm 2.

Can preheat be tolerated?

Not only does a high level of preheat make conditions more difficult for thewelder; the parent steel can be damaged if it has been tempered at a lowtemperature. In other cases the steel being repaired may contain items,

which are damaged by excessive heating. Preheat levels can be reduced byusing consumables of ultra-low hydrogen content or by non-ferritic weldmetals. Of these, austenitic electrodes may need some preheat, but themore expensive nickel alloys usually do not. However, the latter may besensitive to high sulphur and phosphorus contents in the parent steel ifdiluted into the weld metal.

Can softening or hardening of the heat affected zone (HAZ)be tolerated?

Softening of the HAZ is likely in very high strength steels, particularly if theyhave been tempered at low temperatures. Such softening cannot beavoided, but its extent can be minimised. Hard HAZs are particularlyvulnerable where service conditions can lead to stress corrosion. Solutionscontaining H2S (hydrogen sulphide) may demand hardness’ below 248HV(22HRC) although fresh aerated seawater appears to tolerate up to about450HV. Excessively hard HAZ’s may, therefore, require post-weld heattreatment (PWHT) to soften them but provided cracking has been avoided.

Page 260: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 260/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Weld Repairs

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010 

Is PWHT practicable?

 Although it may be desirable, PWHT may not be possible for the samereasons that preheating is not possible. For large structures, local PWHTmay be possible, but care should be taken to abide by the relevant codes,because it is all too easy to introduce new residual stresses by improperlyexecuted PWHT.

Is PWHT necessary?

PWHT may be needed for one of several reasons, and the reason must beknown before considering whether it can be avoided.

Will the fatigue resistance of the repair be adequate?

If the repair is in an area, which is highly stressed by fatigue, and particularlyif the attempted repair is of a fatigue crack, inferior fatigue life can beexpected unless the weld surface is ground smooth and no surface defectsare left. Fillet welds, in which the root cannot be ground smooth, are nottolerable in areas of high fatigue stress.

Will the repair resist its environment?

Besides corrosion, it is important to consider the possibility of stresscorrosion, corrosion fatigue, thermal fatigue and oxidation in service.

Corrosion and oxidation resistance usually requires that the composition ofthe filler metal is at least as noble or oxidation resistant as the parent metal.For corrosion fatigue resistance, the repair weld profile may need to besmoothed.

To resist stress corrosion, PWHT may be necessary to restore the correct

microstructure, reduce hardness and reduce the residual stress left by therepair.

Can the repair be inspected and tested?

For onerous service, radiography and/or ultrasonic examination are oftendesirable, but problems are likely if stainless steel or nickel alloy filler isused; moreover, such repairs cannot be assessed by magnetic particleinspection. In such cases, it is particularly important to carry out theprocedural tests for repairs very critically, to ensure that there are no risks ofcracking and no likelihood of serious welder-induced defects.

Indeed, for all repair welds, it is vital to ensure that the welders are properlymotivated and carefully supervised.

Page 261: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 261/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010Weld Repairs

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010 

 As-welded repairs

Repair without PWHT is, of course, normal where the original weld was notheat treated, but some alloy steels and many thick-sectioned componentsrequire PWHT to maintain a reasonable level of toughness, corrosionresistance etc. However, PWHT of components in service is not alwayseasy or even possible, and local PWHT may give rise to more problemsthan it solves except in simple structures.

Page 262: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 262/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010 Arc Welding Safety

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010 

1 General 

Working in a safe manner, whether in the workshop or on site, is animportant consideration in any welding operation. The responsibility forsafety is on the individuals, not only for their own safety, but also for otherpeople’s safety. The Visual/Welding Inspector has an important function in

ensuring that safe working legislation is in place and safe working practicesare implemented. The Inspector may be required to carry out safety auditsof welding equipment prior to welding, implement risk assessment/permit towork requirements or monitor the safe working operations for a particulartask, during welding.

There are a number of documents that the inspector may refer to forguidance:

•  Government legislation – The Health & Safety at Work Act.

•  Health & Safety Executive – COSHH Regulations, Statutory instruments.

•  Work or site instructions – permits to work, risk assessment documents

etc•  Local authority requirements.

There are four aspects of arc welding safety that the Visual/WeldingInspector needs to consider

•  Electric shock

•  Heat and light

•  Fumes and gases

•  Noise

2 Electr ic ShockThe hazard of electric shock is one of the most serious and immediate risksfacing personnel involved in the welding operation.

Contact with metal parts, which are electrically hot, can cause injury ordeath because of the effect of the shock upon the body or because of a fallas a result of the reaction to electric shock.

The electric shock hazard associated with arc welding may be divided intotwo categories:

  Primary voltage shock - 230 or 460V•  Secondary voltage shock - 60 to 100V

Page 263: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 263/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010 Arc Welding Safety

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010 

Primary voltage shock is very hazardous because it is much greater thanthe secondary voltage of the welding equipment. Electric shock from theprimary (input) voltage can occur by touching a lead inside the weldingequipment with the power to the welder switched on while the body or handtouches the welding equipment case or other earthed metal. Residual circuitdevices (RCDs) connected to circuit breakers of sufficient capacity will help

to protect the welder and other personnel from the danger of primary electricshock.

Secondary voltage shock occurs when touching a part of the electrodecircuit - perhaps a damaged area on the electrode cable - and another partof the body touches both sides of the welding circuit (electrode and work, orwelding earth) at the same time.

Most welding equipment is unlikely to exceed open circuit voltages of 100V.Electric shock, even at this level can be serious, so the welding circuitshould be fitted with low voltage safety devices, to minimise the potential ofsecondary electric shock.

 A correctly wired welding circuit should contain three leads:

•  A welding lead, from one terminal of the power source to the electrodeholder or welding torch.

•  A welding return lead to complete the circuit, from the work to the otherterminal of the power source.

•  An earth lead, from the work to an earth point. The power source shouldalso be earthed.

 All three leads should be capable of carrying the highest welding current

required.

In order to establish whether the capacity of any piece of current carryingequipment is adequate for the job, the Visual/ Welding Inspector can refer tothe Duty Cycle of the equipment.

 All current carrying welding equipment is rated in terms of:

Duty cycle All current carrying conductors heat up when welding current is passedthrough them. Duty cycle is essentially a measure of the capability of thewelding equipment in terms of the ratio of welding time to total time, which

can be expressed as:

Duty cycle = Welding time x 100Total time

By observing this ratio the current carrying conductors will not be heatedabove their rated temperature. Duty cycles are based on a total time of 10minutes.

Page 264: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 264/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010 Arc Welding Safety

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010 

Example

 A power source has a rated output of 350A at 60% duty cycle.

This means that this particular power source will deliver 350A (its ratedoutput) for six minutes out of every ten minutes without overheating.

Failure to carefully observe the duty cycle of a piece of equipment can overstress the part, and in the case of welding equipment cause overheatingleading to instability and the potential for electric shock.

3 Heat and Light

3.1 Heat

In arc welding, electrical energy is converted into heat energy and lightenergy, both of which can have serious health consequences.

The welding arc creates sparks, which have the potential to cause

flammable materials near the welding area to ignite and cause fires. Thewelding area should be clear of all combustible materials and it is goodpractice for the Inspector to know where the nearest fire extinguishers aresituated and know the correct type of fire extinguisher to use if a fire doesbreak out.

Welding sparks can cause serious burns, so protective clothing, such aswelding gloves, flame retardant coveralls and leathers must be worn aroundany welding operation in order to protect against heat and sparks.

3.2 Light

Light radiation is emitted by the welding arc in three principal ranges:

TypeWavelength,nanometres

Infrared (heat) >700

Visible light 400-700

Ultraviolet radiation <400

3.2.1 Ultravio let radiation (UV)

 All arc processes generate UV. Excess exposure to UV causes skininflammation, and possibly even skin cancer or permanent eye damage.

However the main risk amongst welders and Inspectors is for inflammationof the cornea and conjunctiva, commonly known as arc eye or flash.

Page 265: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 265/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010 Arc Welding Safety

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010 

 Arc eye is caused by UV radiation. This damages the outmost protectivelayer of cells in the cornea. Gradually the damaged cells die and fall off thecornea exposing highly sensitive nerves in the underlying cornea to thecomparatively rough inner part of the eyelid. This causes intense pain,usually described as sand in the eye. The pain becomes even more acute ifthe eye is then exposed to bright light.

 Arc eye develops some hours after exposure, which may not even havebeen noticed. The sand in the eye symptom and pain usually lasts for 12-24hours, but can be longer in more severe cases. Fortunately, arc eye isalmost always a temporary condition. In the unlikely event of prolonged andfrequently repeated exposures, permanent damage can occur.

Treatment of arc eye is simple: rest in a dark room. A qualified person orhospital casualty department can administer various soothing anaestheticeye drops. These can provide almost instantaneous relief. Prevention isbetter than cure and wearing safety glasses with side shields willconsiderably reduce the risk of this condition.

Ultraviolet effects upon the skin

The UV from arc processes does not produce the browning effect ofsunburn; but does result in reddening and irritation caused by changes inthe minute surface blood vessels. In extreme cases, the skin may beseverely burned and blisters may form. The reddened skin may die andflake off in a day or so. Where there has been intense prolonged or frequentexposure, skin cancers can develop.

3.2.2 Visible light

Intense visible light particularly approaching UV or blue light wavelengths

passes through the cornea and lens and can dazzle and, in extreme cases,damage the network of optically sensitive nerves on the retina. Wave-lengths of visible light approaching the infrared have slightly different effectsbut can produce similar symptoms. Effects depend on the duration andintensity of exposure and to some extent, upon the individual's natural reflexaction to close the eye and exclude the incident light. Normally this dazzlingdoes not produce a long-term effect.

3.2.3 Infrared radiation

Infrared radiation is of longer wavelength than the visible light frequencies,and is perceptible as heat. The main hazard to the eyes is that prolonged

exposure (over a matter of years) causes a gradual but irreversible opacityof the lens. Fortunately, the infrared radiation emitted by normal weldingarcs causes damage only within a comparatively short distance from thearc. There is an immediate burning sensation in the skin surrounding theeyes should they be exposed to arc heat. The natural human reaction is tomove or cover up to prevent the skin heating, which also reduces eyeexposure.

Page 266: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 266/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010 Arc Welding Safety

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010 

BS EN169 specifies a range of permanent filter shades of graduallyincreasing optical density which limit exposure to radiation emitted bydifferent processes at different currents. It must be stressed that shadenumbers indicated in the standard and the corresponding current ranges arefor guidance only.

4 Fumes and gases4.1 Fumes

Because of the variables involved in fume generation from arc welding andallied processes (such as the welding process and electrode, the basemetal, coatings on the base metal and other possible contaminants in theair), the dangers of welding fume can be considered in a general way. Although health considerations vary according to the type of fumecomposition and individual reactions, the following holds true for mostwelding fume.

The fume plume contains solid particles from the consumables, base metaland base metal coating. Depending on the length of exposure to thesefumes, most acute effects are temporary and include symptoms of burningeyes and skin, dizziness, nausea and fever.

For example, zinc fumes can cause metal fume fever, a temporary illnessthat is similar to the flu. Chronic, long-term exposure to welding fumes canlead to siderosis (iron deposits in the lungs) and may affect pulmonaryfunction.

Cadmium, however, is a different story. This toxic metal can be found onsteel as a coating or in silver solder. Cadmium fumes can be fatal even

under brief exposure, with symptoms much like those of metal fume fever.These two should not be confused. Twenty minutes of welding in thepresence of cadmium can be enough to cause fatalities, with symptomsappearing within an hour and death five days later.

4.2 Gases

The gases that result from an arc welding process also present a potentialhazard. Most of the shielding gases (argon, helium and carbon dioxide) arenon-toxic. When released, however, these gases displace oxygen in thebreathing air, causing dizziness, unconsciousness and death the longer thebrain is denied oxygen.

Some degreasing compounds such as trichlorethylene and perchlor-ethylene can decompose from the heat and ultraviolet radiation to producetoxic gases. Ozone and nitrogen oxides are produced when UV radiationhits the air. These gases cause headaches, chest pains, irritation of theeyes and itchiness in the nose and throat.

Page 267: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 267/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010 Arc Welding Safety

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010 

To reduce the risk of hazardous fumes and gases, keep the head out of thefume plume. As obvious as this sounds, it is a common cause of fume andgas over-exposure because the concentration of fumes and gases isgreatest in the plume.

In addition, use mechanical ventilation or local exhaust at the arc to direct

the fume plume away from the face. If this is not sufficient, use fixed ormovable exhaust hoods to draw the fume from the general area. Finally, itmay be necessary to wear an approved respiratory device if sufficientventilation cannot be provided.

 As a rule of thumb, if the air is visibly clear and the welder is comfortable,the ventilation is probably adequate.

To identify hazardous substances, first read the material safety data sheetfor the consumable to see what fumes can be reasonably expected fromuse of the product.

Refer to the Occupational Exposure Limit (OEL) as defined in the COSHHregulations which gives maximum concentrations to which a healthy adultcan be exposed to any one substance.

Second, know the base metal and determine if a paint or coating wouldcause toxic fumes or gases.

Particular attention should also be made to the dangers of asphyxiationwhen welding in confined spaces. Risk assessment, permits to work andgas testing are some of the necessary actions required to ensure the safetyof all personnel.

5 Noise

Exposure to loud noise can permanently damage hearing. Noise can alsocause stress and increase blood pressure. Working in a noisy environmentfor long periods can contribute to tiredness, nervousness and irritability. Ifthe noise exposure is greater than 85 decibels averaged over an 8 hourperiod then hearing protection must be worn, and annual hearing testsshould be carried out.

Normal welding operations are not associated with noise level problems withtwo exceptions: Plasma arc welding and air carbon arc cutting. If either ofthese two operations is to be performed then hearing protectors must beworn. The noise associated with welding is usually due to ancillaryoperations such as chipping, grinding and hammering. Hearing protectionmust be worn when carrying out, or when working in the vicinity of, theseoperations.

Page 268: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 268/302

 

Rev 1 January 2010 Arc Welding Safety

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010 

6 Summary

The best way to manage the risks associated with welding is byimplementing risk management programmes. Risk management is amethod that requires the identification of hazards, assessment of the risksand implementation of suitable controls to reduce the risk to an acceptable

level.

It is essential to evaluate and review a risk management programme.Evaluation involves ensuring that control measures have eliminated orreduced the risks, and review aims to check that the process is workingeffectively to identify hazards and manage risks.

It is quite likely that the Visual/Welding Inspector would be involved inmanaging the risks associated with welding as part of their duties.

Page 269: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 269/302

Ultrasonic Inspection Report

Reference Number: IR 7  Sheet: 1 of 1 

Weld Reference: wn10 Welder No: 1 

Weld Preparation

Report:

Action:

 Name:  Signature:  Date: 

Qualification Details: 

Probe and Frequency Size Sensitivity Setting

70º 4 MHZ MAP F.S.H From 1.5mm Hole

60º 10 MHZ MAP F.S.H From 1.5 mm Hole

2

40

Material Type: Carbon Mn Steel (Plate) 

Surface Condition:  As Welded

Welding Process: M.M.A 

Ultrasonic Unit: USM 3 

Couplant: 

Longitudinal and Transverse carried out from surface side only. Lack of side wall fusionlocated using 60º probe.

Place

stamp

here

Page 270: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 270/302

  Magnetic Particle Report

Reference Number : MT 101  Sheet 1 of 1

Weld Reference: wn 78 m Welder No:

Weld Preparation

Report: Slight Sub-Surface indication 157mm from datum

Action:

 No action required

 Name: Robert Staines Signature: S. Staines Date: 30/04/08 

Qualification Details:

2

20

Material Type: Carbon Mn steel (Plate)

Surface Condition: As Welded

Welding Process: GTAW 

Method of Magnetisation

Parallel Conductors, AC Yoke 240v, Spacing 4inch

One Direction used only.

Black Ink to BS4069

Dye Penetrant Method

 Not Used

Place

Stamp here

Page 271: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 271/302

 

Radiographic Report

Reference Number :  IR 12  Sheet 1 of 1 

Weld Reference:  wn 10  Welder No: NA 

Weld Preparation  Material Type:  Carbon Mn Steel (Plate) 

Surface Condition: As Welded 

Welding Process: Sub-Arc 2nd

 Side Back Gouged

Radiographic Equipment/Gamma:  Co 60  KV: 150  Source Strength:  100C 

MA________ FFD/SFD: 30cms  Exposure Time: 1Hr 

Film Type & Size: AGFA D4  Focal Spot/Source Dimensions:  3x3mm 

Development time & Temp:  8min @ 16ºc  Screens:  0.125 Lead-Rear Only 

Radiographic Technique:  DWDI  IQI Type: 13 Cu EN 462 

Film Identification Sensitivity Density Comments Action

A-B 1.9 2.5 150mm From A, Lack of Penetration

B-C 1.9 2.2 3mm from B Transverse Crack, or Film Mark

C-D 1.9 2.2 No Defects Observed

 Name: Tom Farthing  Signature: T. Farthing  Date: 19/06/08 

Qualification Details: PCN PPPCCCNNN PlaceStamp

Here

355.0

Page 272: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 272/302

  1

 Appendix 3

Senior Welding Inspector  Fractured Surfaces

TWI WIS10 Preparatory for CSWIP (3.2) Exam

Fatigue Failure

Fatigue is a mechanism of failure experienced by materials under the action of a cyclicstress. It involves initiation and growth of a crack under an applied stress amplitude that may lay well within the static capacity of the material. Discontinuities such aschanges in section or material flaws are favoured sites for fatigue initiation. Duringsubsequent propagation the crack grows a microscopic amount with each load cycle.The crack so-formed often remains tightly closed, and thus difficult to find by visualinspection during the majority of the life. If cracking remains undiscovered, there is a

risk that it may spread across a significant portion of the load-bearing cross section,leading to final separation by fracture of the remaining ligament, or another failure modemay intervene such as jamming of a mechanism. Fatigue occurs in metals, plastics,composites and ceramics. It is the most common mode of failure in structural andmechanical engineering components. Fatigue failure is synonymous with the aviationindustry where square window frames within the initial design of the first commercial jetairliner the Comet 4 C caused fatigue failures and tragic loss of life on 2 full commercialaircraft at around 10,000 hrs of flight time before the fracture mechanism was fullyidentified and re-mediated and is the reason why we look out of oval windows wheneverwe should fly by jet aircraft.

The phenomenon has been investigated extensively over many decades, particularly inmetals and alloys. As a result, design guidance is readily available in many texts and iswidely codified. Joints in materials are particularly susceptible to fatigue and thereforeneed to be designed with care for cyclic loading. Fatigue design rules for welded andbolted connections in steel can be found in many national standards, e.g. BS 7608 andBS 5400 widely used in the UK.

Morphology

Fatigue cracks generally exhibit a smooth surface and propagate at 90° to the directionof applied stress. The initiation points can usually be identified as weld flaws/features,

machining marks or geometrical stress raisers. In some instances striations and beachmarks can be seen. Striations can be viewed using and electron microscope and arerecords of the crack growing under each loading cycle. Beach marks can be view withthe naked eye and can indicate a change in loading pattern. Both of these phenomenacan be used to estimate the fatigue crack growth rate. Fatigue cracks continue to growuntil the increasing level of stress cannot be supported with the final few cycles inducinglarger amounts of fracture surface and final fracture occurs.

Page 273: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 273/302

  2

The final fracture surface will show an area of fatigue failure emanating from the fractureinitiation point, with the fractured surface characterised by beach marks. These beachmarks may no longer be visible due to burnishing caused by metal/metal contact,though the final beach mark at the point of final failure is as a rule generally alwayspresent.

Striations (x1500)

Beach marks – initiation site arrowed 

Fatigue design

The standard method of representing fatigue test data is on an S-N curve. This plotseither the stress or strain range on the y-axis and the number of cycles to failure on thex-axis. The lower the stress range, the more cycles are required to cause failure. Whenpotted on logarithmic axes the data for a particular specimen type can be approximated

to a straight line between 105  and 107  cycles. Under constant amplitude loadingconditions most materials exhibit a fatigue limit. It is believed that tests performed atstress ranges below this limit will never cause a fatigue failure. For un-welded steels thefatigue limit occurs at approximately 2 million cycles, for welded steels and aluminiumalloys this is closer to 10 million cycles. Because of the relatively low fatigue limit,aircraft components made from aluminium alloys have a finite lifespan, after which theyare replaced. Fatigue is generally independent of rate of loading and temperatureexcept at very high temperatures when creep is likely. However, the presence of a

Page 274: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 274/302

  3

corrosive environment (e.g. sea-water) can have a significant detrimental effect onfatigue performance in the form of corrosion fatigue.

10 3 10 4 10 5 10 6 10 7 10 8

log (lif e in cycles, N)

log (stress or strain)

R = -1

S-N curve

Strain control

Load control

 

Typical S-N curve

Flaw assessment

In welded joints, fabrication flaws may give rise to premature fatigue failure, particularlyplanar flaws such as lack of fusion. Using fracture mechanics, the rate at which fatiguecracking will grow from such features can be estimated, and in this way tolerable flawsizes can be derived. British Standard 7910 provides detailed guidance on this methodof assessment.

Factors to be considered when investigating a fatigue failureFatigue cracks initiate at areas of stress concentration such as discontinuities,weldments or sires of mechanical damage. They are a result of cyclic loading and canoccur at stress ranges well below the material’s UTS. It is of prime importance tounderstand the nature (vibration, thermal, mechanical etc.) and magnitude of theloading in order to prevent failure. Often the final failure of the component/structure willbe due to brittle or ductile fracture, therefore the fracture surface will show acombination of failure modes.

Remediation

For weldments where fatigue is known to be a problem, life extension techniques suchas weld toe burr machining, TIG dressing and peening can be used. These are effectivebut labour intensive and therefore expensive.

Page 275: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 275/302

  4

Britt le fractureBrittle fracture is the rapid run of a crack(s) through a stressed material. There is verylittle prior plastic deformation and so failures occur without warning. In brittle fracture thecracks run close to perpendicular to the applied stress, leaving a relatively flat surface at

the break. A brittle fracture surface may exhibit one or more of the following features.Some fractures have lines and ridges beginning at the origin of the crack and spreadingout across the crack surface. Others, some steels for example, have back-to-back V-shaped ‘Chevron’ markings pointing to the origin of the crack. Amorphous materialssuch as ceramic glass have a shiny smooth fracture surface and very hard or fine-grained materials may show no special pattern.

Chevron f racture surface 

Radiating r idge fracture surface 

In common with fatigue fractures all brittle fractures require a point of initiation, andtherefore generally formed at areas of high stress concentration. This could be from aweld toe, undercut, arc strike, or could possibly be at the tip of a freshly initiated fatigue

crack, as is though to have been the case with the Liberty Vessels sunk during theSecond World War and which often sailed through the icy cold and tempestuous ArcticOcean in order to avoid detection and destruction from the German U Boat torpedoes.

Fatigue cracks are though to have initiated at the square hatches through bad design,as in order to increase shipping production faster than shipping losses due to sinkingthe Liberty Vessels were the first welded vessels in the history of ship construction.

Page 276: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 276/302

  5

Ductile Fracture

When compared with brittle fractures, ductile fractures move relatively slowly and thefailure is usually accompanied by a large amount of plastic deformation. Ductile fracturesurfaces have larger necked regions and an overall rougher appearance than a brittlefracture surface. The failure of many ductile materials can be attributed to cup and cone

fracture. This form of ductile fracture occurs in stages that initiate after necking begins.

Page 277: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 277/302

  6

Plane strain effect

 A condition in linear elastic fracture mechanics in which there is zero strain in a directionnormal to both the axis of applied tensile stress and the direction of crack growth. Underplane strain conditions, the plane of fracture instability is normal to the axis of principalstress. This condition is found in thick plates. Along the crack border stress conditions

change from plane strain in the body of the metal towards plane stress at the surface,this is displayed by the appearance of thin bands, caused by intense shear, that breakthrough to the free surface. The structure now becomes a mechanism, and whereplasticity breaks through to the surface shear lips will be observed.

Plane strain fracture: - plastic zone diameter r o much less than sample thickness

Synopsis

1) Fatigue failures 

Generally produce beach marks indicating boundaries of plastic slip, generally > x 1 x 106 cycles. The fracture initiation point forms generally from a stress concentration ie weldtoe, crack, or an abrupt change in section and can generally be identified at the epicentre of the beach mark/radii. Never the final, but very often the first mode of fracture, fatigue

failures are generally normal (90°) to the plain of the applied cyclic stress.

2) Ductile failuresGenerally occur at 45°  to plain of the applied stress with the fracture surface having arough or torn appearance. They may often occur as the second or final mode of failurein a fatigue specimen where the CSA can no longer support the load and are generallyaccompanied by shear lips. (Local plastic deformation)

Page 278: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 278/302

  7

3) Brit tle failures

Generally occur at 90° to plane of the applied stress with the fracture surface having asmooth crystalline appearance. Again the fracture initiation point forms generally from astress concentration ie welded toe, crack, or abrupt change in section and can be oftenbe identified by the presence of chevrons, which point to the fracture initiation point.Failures that initiate as brittle fractures are unlikely to show evidence representing anyother forms of fracture morphology upon their surfaces.

When in initiated as brittle fractures these surfaces do not show any plastic indicationsand if initiated as such will remain purely as brittle fractures, traveling in excess of thespeed of sound.

4) Plane strain effect

Flat areas occurring at 90°  indicating plane strain effect may also appear centrallyupon fractured surfaces, and are caused by the inelastic behavior in larger material

thickness, in otherwise ductile specimens. It is thus possible to find a single fracturesurface showing 1 2 and 4 of the above characteristics, as in the ductile CTOD or cracktip opening displacement test shown below.

12

4 3 4

4

1. Machined notch

2. Fatigue crack

3. Plane strain effect

4. Ductile plastic failureindicating shear lips

Page 279: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 279/302

 

Material Sheet and Test Certificate

19

25 25 x 3360 x 6740

Cast No. %C %Si %Mn %S %P %Cr %Ni %Mo %Nb %V

20721 0.15 0.38 1.42 0.04 0.05 0.04 0.04 0.002 0.004 0.005

KJ 1

112 -50 71

2

91

3 av

75 79

C

VPN 10Value

NA

Certificate Number: 424239-D Invoice Number: 9789-08 Customer order No: TS0127

Name & Address: TWGranta Park

 AbingtonCambridgeCB21 6AL

Description: Fine Grain Weldable Pressure Vessel SteelSpecification: EN10028-3 1993Grade: P355NL1

Ladle Anal sis

Mechanical and Physical Properties

MillIdentification

PlateNumber

44466 012

BatchNumber

QF6134 N/A

Quantity

1

Descriptionmm

WeightKgs

5060

SurfaceCondition

NormalisedEN 10 163-2

Class B3

TensileStrength

RmN/mm2

YieldStrength

ReN/mm2

El% onGauge length of

80mm 200mm

21 32

  TWI Steel Works

QA Engineer

Date: 10 June 2008EN 10204: 3.2

539 417

Impact Values J

Third Party Authorising

Special Requests: Ultrasonic examination in accordance with BSEN 10160:1999 Class S3

STRAEl%

NA

Page 280: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 280/302

 

BS EN 10028-3 1993 Flat products made of steel for pressure purposes

Designation Mechanical Properties min unless stated

Steel Name(Part) 

Thickness Yield StressRe 

Tensile Strength  Rm 

Elongation A

mm  N/mm2 N/mm2   %

P275≤35 >35≤50

>50≤70

>70≤100 >100≤150

275265255235225

390/510390/510390/510370/490350/470

2424242323

P355

≤35 >35≤50>50≤70>70≤100>100≤150 

355345325315295

490/630490/630490/630470/610450/590

2222222121

P460

≤16>16≤35>35≤50>50≤70>70≤100>100≤150

460450440420400380

570/720570/720570/720570/720540/710520/690

171717171616

Page 281: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 281/302

 

BS EN 100028-3: 1993 Flat products made of Steels for pressure purpose

BS EN 10028-3: 1993 Flat products made of Steels for pressure purposes

P…N Longitudinal

P…NH

P…NL1

P…NL2

Longitudinal

Longitudinal

Longitudinal

Minimum im act ener KV in J in Normal ised condit ion N

-50 -40 -20 0 20

-

27

27

30

-

34

34

40

40

47

47

65

47

55

55

90

55

63

63

100

Designation Chemical composi tion % by mass max unless stated

Steel Name

P275NP275NHP275NL1P275NL2

P355NP355NHP355NL1P355NL2

P460NP460NHP460NL1

P460NL2

C

0.180.180.160.16

0.200.200.180.18

0.200.200.20

0.20

Si Mn P S Cr Mo Ni Nb Ti V Al Cu

0.400.400.400.40

0.500.500.500.50

0.600.600.60

0.60

1.401.401.501.50

1.701.701.701.70

1.701.701.70

1.70

0.030.030.030.02

0.030.030.030.02

0.030.030.03

0.02

.025

.025

.02

.015

.025

.025

.025

.015

.025

.020

.020

.015 

0.300.300.300.30

0.300.300.300.30

0.300.300.30

0.30

0.080.080.080.08

0.080.080.080.08

0.100.100.10

0.10

0.500.500.500.50

0.500.500.500.50

0.800.800.80

0.80

0.050.050.050.05

0.050.050.050.05

0.050.050.05

0.05

0.030.030.030.03

0.030.030.030.03

0.030.030.03

0.03

0.050.050.050.05

0.100.100.100.10

0.200.200.20

0.20

0.020.020.020.02

0.020.020.020.02

.025

.025

.025

.025

0.30.30.30.3

0.30.30.30.3

0.70.70.7

0.7

Page 282: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 282/302

   A    B    C    D    E    F    G    H

   S   I   Z   E

    T    I    T    L    E

   D   W   G   N   O

    A    S    S    E    M    B    L    Y    B    R    A    C    K    E    T

    R    E    V

    1    3    /    0    1    /    2    0    0    9

   p    d   e

    C    A

    M    B    R    I    D    G    E

    C    B    2    1  -    6    A    L

  -

    U    K

    G    R    E    A    T

    A    B    I    N    G    T    O    N

    T    W    I

    L    t    d

    G    R    A    N    T    A

    P    A    R    K

    D    R    A    W    N

    C    H    E    C    K    E    D

    A    M    F    G

    A

    R    O    V    E    D

    N    5

                  `   `

    0

    5    0

               `

    N    7

    2

    D    E    C    I    M    A    L

    P    L    A    C    E    S

    0 .    0

    5

   O   T   H   E   R

   D   I   M   E   N   S   I   O   N   S

    G    E    N    E    R    A    L

    T    O    L    E    R    A    N    C    E    S

    0 .    1

    0

    1

    D    E    C    I    M    A    L

    P    L    A    C    E

    D    I

    M    E    N        S

    I    O    N    S

    I    N

    M    I    L    I    M    E    T    R    E    S

    3

    A    N    G    L    E

    R    D

    P   a   r    t   s    L    i   s    t

    D    E    S    C    R    I    P    T    I    O    N

    P    A    R    T    N    U    M    B    E    R

    Q    T    Y

    I    T    E    M

    3    5    0   x    3    5    0   x    1    2

    2    1    6    6  -    C    0    1    0

    1

    1

    1    5    0   x    7    5   x    1    2

    2    1    6    6  -    C    0    1    1

    2

    2

    2    5    0   x    1    5    0   x    1    2

    2    1    6    6  -    C    0    1    2

    2

    3

    3    0    0   x    1    2    5   x    1    2

    2    1    6    6  -    C    0    1    3

    2

    4

    2    0    0   x    1    5    0   x    1    2

    2    1    6    6  -    C    0    1    4

    1

    5

    6    0    O    D    5    W    A    L    L    8    0    L    O    N    G

    2    1    6    6  -    C    0    1    5

    2

    6

    2    5

   1    3

    2    5

    2    5

    3    0    0

   1    2    5 1    2    5

    1    5    0

    1    5    0

    2    5    0

   1    5    0

    7    5

   1    5    0

    7    5

    8    0

    8    0

    7    5

    2    0    0

    1    0    0

    2    0   x

    4    5    ~

    3    5    0

    3    5    0

A    T    E    R    I    A    L

   :  -

    1    2

      T

    H    I    C    K

    C    A    R    B    O    N

    S    T    E    E    L

O    T    E

   :

  -

    A    L    L

    B    U    T    T

    W    E    L    D    S

    T    O

    B    E

    F    U         L

    L

    N    E    T    R    A    T    I    O    N

    F    R    O    M

    O    N    E

        S

    I    D    E

        1        3        5

        1        3        5

      z        6

        1        3        5

        1        3        5

        1        1        1

      z        6

        1        3        5

      z        6

        1        3        5

      z        6

        1        3        5

      a        6

        1        3        5

      z        6

        1        3        5

      z        6

        1        3        5

      z        8

        1        1        1

        1        4        1

    4

    3

    3

    1

    2

    5

    6

    6

    2

    4

Page 283: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 283/302

Page 284: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 284/302

Page 285: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 285/302

      S

     E      C     T     I      O     N

     A   -

     A

     A     B     C     D     E     F

    C    A    M    B    R    I    D    G    E

    C    B    2    1  -    6    A    L

  -

    U    K

   p    d   e

    G    R    E    A    T

    A    B    I    N    G    T    O    N

    T    W    I

    L    t    d

    G    R    A    N    T    A

    P    A    R    K

    0    6    /    0    2    /    2    0    0

    V    E    S    S    E    L    F    A    B    R    I    C    A    T    I    O    N

    D    W    G    N    O

    S    I    Z    E

    T    I    T    L    E

    A    P    P    R    O    V    E    D

    M    F    G

    Q    A

    C    H    E    C    K    E    D

    D    R    A    W    N

    R    E    V

    D    I    M

    E    N    S    I    O    N    S

    I    N

    M    I    L    L    I    M    E    T    R    E    S

    3

    2

    D    E    C    I    M    A    L

    P    L    A    C    E    S

    A    N    G    L    E

    R    D

         `

    1

    D    E    C    I    M    A    L

    P    L    A    C    E

    N    7

        0

 .    5        0

    O    T    H    E    R

    D    I    M    E    N    S    I    O    N    S

    N    5

        0

 .    1        0

                  `         `

        0

 .        0

    5

    G    E    N    E    R    A    L

    T    O    L    E    R    A    N    C    E    S

      A A

    1

    2

    3

    4

    5

    6

    7

    8

    9

    1    0

    1    1

     4     0

     0

     4     0     0

     4     0     0     0

       n

     5     7     0

     2     0     0     0

     9     0     0

    2    4    0    0 Ø

 2 5 °

     1     2     0     0

     8     0     0

     1     1     5     0

     1     0     0

     2     0

     1     0     0

   1    0

    2    0

     2     4     0     0

     2     3     5     0

    5    0

       3       0       °

     5     0

    5    0

     7     0     0

   1    5    0

    5    0    0 Ø  2

     5

     6     0     0

      Ø

     7     0     0

      Ø

   1    4    0    0

     C     A     S     T     S     /     S

     I     N     S     P     E     C     T     I     O     N

     C     A     S     T     S     /     S

     I     N     L     E     T     V     A     L     V     E

     C     A     S     T     S     /     S

     O     U     T     L     E     T     V     A     L     V     E

    N    O    T    E

   :  -

    S    H    E    L    L

    1    5    T

    H    I    C    K

    D    I    S    H

    E    N    D    S

    P    R    E  -    F    A    B

    M    A    T    E    R    I    A    L

   :  -

    M    A    I    N

    V    E    S    S    E    L    L

    3    1    6    L

    1    8    %    /    8    % .

    S    U    P    P    O    R    T

    F    R    A    M    E

    C    A    R    B    O    N

    S    T    E    E

    L

    W    E    L    D

    P    R    O    C    E    D    U    R    E

    U    S

    E    D

   :  -

    H    E    A    L    T    H

    A    N    D

    S    A    F    E    T    Y

    C    O    N    C    E    R    N    S

   :  -

    B    U    I    L    D

    S    E    Q    U    E    N    C    E

   :  -

    C    O    N    S    U    M    A    B    L    E    S

   :  -

     4     5     °

     2     9     8     0

     1     3     6

     1     3     6

    z     4

     1     3     5

    z

     5

     1     4     1

     1     4     1

     1     3     5

    z     4

     W     P     S

    z     6

     1     3     5

Page 286: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 286/302

Rev 1 January 2010Further Reading

Copyright© TWI Ltd 2010 

Further reading

 Aluminium and its Alloys, F King Ellis Horwood LtdISBN 0-7458-0013-0

Welding Aluminium – Theory and Practice Aluminium AssociationISBN 89-080539

Behaviour and Design of Aluminium Structures, M L Sharp McGraw HillISBN 0-07-056478-7

Metals Handbook Volume 2: Properties and Selection:Non Ferrous Alloys

Volume 4: Heat TreatingVolume 6: Welding Brazing and Soldering

 ASM Handbook Series

 Aluminium and Aluminium Alloys Ed J R Davis ASM International ASM Speciality Handbook ISBN 0-87170-496X

Welding Kaiser Aluminium Kaiser Aluminium

Page 287: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 287/302

  1

 Appendix 2

Senior Welding Inspector

NDT Reports: Quality Check List

Radiographic testing

BS EN 1330  Terms used in NDT radiological flaw detectionReplaces BS 3683 Part 3 

BS EN 1435 Methods for radiographic examination of fusion-welded butt joints insteel plate/pipe. Replaces BS 2600 Parts 1 –2 

BS EN 444 Methods for radiographic examination of fusion welded butt joints in steel pipe. Replaces BS 2910

BS EN 462 Part 1  Image Quality Indicators and recommendations for their useReplaces BS 3971 

BS 2737 (current) Radiology of internal defects in castings as revealed by radiography.

1) Focal spot or source size and strength should be displayed on the apparatus andevidence of this should be available.

2) Calibration of densitometers using a traceable film density strip

3) Regular checks to be carried out on safe lights.

4) Records to be kept of processing solutions including replenisher.

5) Lead and salt screens to be checked regularly.

6) Characteristic curves, exposure charts and IQI charts should be available.

7) Metals strip wedges should be available.

8) Radiation safety measures should be employed to the latest regulations.Evidence of radiation monitor calibration should be available.

9) Film storage.

10) Certificate of competency.

11) Film test strips should be used for both manual and automatic systems.

Page 288: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 288/302

  2

 Appendix 2

Senior Welding Inspector

Ultrasonic testing (manual operation)

BS EN 12668

Part 1  Assessing the performance characteristics of UT equipment

Part 2  Electrical performance of UT equipment

Part 3  Guidance on in-service monitoring of probes(excluding immersion probes)Replaces BS 4331 Parts 1–3

BS 2704 (current)  Specification for calibration blocks for use in U/T

BS EN 585 Parts 1-5 Method of UT examination of welded structures

BS EN 1714 replaces BS 3923

Part 1 Manual examination of fusion welds in ferritic steelsPart 2 Automatic examination of fusion welded butt joints in ferritic steelsPart 3 Manual examination of nozzle welds  

1) Evidence should be available that regular checks carried out to BS EN 12668

2) Correct calibration blocks are available with evidence of dimensional checks havingbeen carried out

3) Check evidence of certified personnel

4) Identification of equipment and probes, beam plots if appropriate

Page 289: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 289/302

  3

 Appendix 2

Senior Welding Inspector

Penetrant testing

BS EN 571 Part 1  Penetrant flaw detectionReplaces BS 6443

BS EN 3059  Measurement of UV A radiation (black light) used in NDTReplaces BS 4489

BS EN 1330 Terms used in NDT: penetrant flaw detectionPart 1  Replaces BS 3683 Part 1 

1) Vapour degreaser for acidity.

2) Date stamp aerosol cans. (1 year life for red dye)

3) Check fluorescent and red penetrant comparison of filter papers by eye or black lightmonitor. Check for water contamination. Add 50% by volume to manufacturersquoted water tolerance. If penetrant turns milky it is above the water tolerancespecified.

4) Remover is self-checking. Failure to wash properly.

5) Check temperature of wash water max 35ºC (Use thermometer)

6) Check cleanliness of compressed air line. (Use filter paper at 30cm)

7) Check for contamination of developer as follows:

a) Wet developer (Visual inspection for red. Black light inspection for fluorescent)b) Dry developer (Visual inspection for dampness eg.Grey in colour, not  fluffy. Black

light inspection for fluorescent

8) Air circulating oven. Check thermostat . Maximum permissible temp 85º C

9) Black light. Check minimum intensity depending upon type eg 20 Lux or1000μW/cm2 

10) Check level of white light for red dye operation (Minimum 500 Lux)

Page 290: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 290/302

  4

 Appendix 2

Senior Welding Inspector

Magnetic particle testing

BS EN 9934 Parts 1-3  Magnetic Particle Flaw Detection + Inks and PowdersReplaces BS 6072 and 4049 

BS EN 3059  Measurement of UV A radiation (Black Light) used in NDTReplaces BS 4489 

BS EN 1330  Terms used in NDT Magnetic Particle Flaw DetectionReplaces BS 3683 Part 2 

BS 5044 (current) Contrast aid paints used in MPI

BS 89 (current)  Specification for direct acting indicating electrical measuringinstruments and their accessories

1) Vapour degreaser for acidity

2) Ammeter checks. Difference between check ammeter and m/c ammeter shall notexceed 10% of scale reading. Note check ammeter shall be calibrated to traceablestandard

3) Magnetic Ink composition:

Non-fluorescent inks not less than 1.25% and not more than 3.5% by volumeFluorescent inks not less than 0.1% and not more than 0.3% by volumeOther solids if present not more than 10% by mass of ferromagnetic contentParticle size in at least 99% of a representative sample no particle shall exceed100μm Powders in at least 99% of a representative sample no particle shall exceed 200μm

4) Test for solid content and general condition of inks, agitate ink, place sample of100ml into settlement flask, allow to settle for 60 minutes. Read off result to nearest0.1 ml. Record as solid content by volume. Special test for fluorescent inks: Checkink for evidence of yellow – green fluorescence in the supernatant liquid. If observed

discard the ink

5) Functioning test for magnetic inks and powders.Use ring piece Fig 2 BS 4069. Using 750 amps (RMS) at least 2 holes should givean indication. Residual magnetism technique for powders:Use test piece Fig 3 BS 4069 Mount test piece on an insulated rod, apply 500

 Amps DC through threading bar and apply dry powder to each hole in turncommencing with the hole nearest the surface. powder should be applied at adistance of 200–300mm At least 5 holes should give an indication

Page 291: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 291/302

  5

Magnetic flow technique for inks and powders: Use test piece Fig 4 BS 4069Magnetise test piece parallel to coil axis or use electro-magnets. The hole shouldgive and indication. Aerosol containers should be date stamped

6) Corrosion test: Use low carbon steel bar 150mm long 12.5mm Ǿ  with surfacetexture of 3.2 μm RA. Partially immerse the bar in ink sample form minimum of 12

hours at 25 ºC There should be no evidence of corrosion

7) Black light: Check minimum intensity depending on type:20 Lux or 1.0mW/cm2 or 1000μW/cm2 

8) Check level of white light: Minimum 500 Lux 

9) Permanent magnet + DC magnets Maximum pole spacing of 150mmFor pole spacing less than 75mm the lifting capacity shall be not less than0.24kg/mm of pole spacing. If greater than 75mm lifting power shall be >18kg 

 AC electromagnets: For pole spacing of 300mm or less lifting capacity shall be

4.5kg

Page 292: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 292/302

 Appendix 2

Senior Welding Inspector

 AUDIT of NDT Reports

Reports Check List

RT Radiographic testing

1) Material type (all types)

2) Time/stage of inspection

3) Place of inspection

4) Procedure/standard number given

5) Radiographic technique (eg DWDI) 

6) Screens (type & thickness)

7) Type of radiation (gamma/X-ray)

8) Type/strength of source or Kva

9) SFD

10) Type and range of IQI

11) Speed of film (characteristic curve)

12) Sensitivity as % (below 2%)

13) Density range (2-3.5) 

14) Focal spot size

15) Geometric unsharpness (υg)

16) Exposure time

17) Development method and time

18) All defects Identified, sized and located

19) NDT technicians qualifications and name

20) Signed stamped and dated

21) BS method BS 2910 (pipe) BS 2600 (plate)Now replaced by BS EN 444

Page 293: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 293/302

 Appendix 2

Senior Welding Inspector

 AUDIT of NDT Reports

Reports Check List

UT Ultrasonic testing

1) Material type (large grain lower Hz)

2) Time/stage of inspection

3) Place of inspection

4) Procedure/standard number given

5) Shear/compression probe

6) Probe size (usually 10mm) and type 

7) Probe frequency (4-5MHz < 3 for Cu/SS) 

8) Probe angle <10 =70º /10-15 = 60º-70º >15 = 45º -60º  

9) Calibration block (type and hole used)

10) Calibration range

11) Scanning method

12) Surface finish 

13) Type of couplant

14) Type of equipment

15) Scanning sensitivity

16) Recording level

17) Joint configuration and area of weld tested

18) All defects identified, sized and located

19) NDT technicians qualifications and name

20) Signed stamped and dated

21) BS method BS 3923Now replaced by BS EN 585 and BS N 1714

Page 294: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 294/302

 Appendix 2

Senior Welding Inspector

 AUDIT of NDT Reports 

Reports Check List

MT Magnetic particle testing

1) Material type (ferritic steels only) 

2) Time/stage of inspection

3) Place of inspection

4) Procedure/standard number given

5) Method (wet/dry fluorescent/contrast etc.)

6) Method and standard of surface preparation

7) Method of magnetisation (direct current etc)

8) Equipment type (prod/yoke/magnet/bench)

9) Prod spacing/amperage (7.5 amp/mm) 

10) Contrast paint (type and application

11) Test sequence (2 x directions at 90 °    ) 

12) Poor surface finish may mask indications 

13) Sub surface imperfections (2mm max)

14) Black light 20 Lux or 1000μW/cm2 

15) Contrast light minimum 500 Lux

16) Flux measurement strips/kg force etc

17) > 50°C dry powder inks are used

18) All defects identified, sized and located

19) NDT technicians qualifications & name

20) Signed stamped and dated

21) BS method BS 6072  & inks BS 4049 Now replaced by BS EN 571 

Page 295: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 295/302

 Appendix 2

Senior Welding Inspector

 AUDIT of NDT Reports

Reports Check List

PT Penetrant testing

1) Material type (non-porous only) 

2) Time/stage of inspection

3) Place of inspection

4) Procedure/standard number given

5) Method (colour contrast/fluorescent)

6) Method & standard of surface preparation

7) Surface finish is critical (EB as welded??) 

8) Shelf life of chemicals (normally 1 year) 

9) Penetrant application method (spray/tank) 

10) Penetrant dwell time (5-60 minutes) 

11) Method of penetrant removal

12) Type and application of developer  

13) Evaluation time (10-30 minutes)

14) Black light (20 Lux or 1000  μ W/cm2  )

15) Contrast light (minimum 500 Lux) 

16) Operating temperature range (5-50°C) 

17) Surface breaking only imperfections

18) All defects identified, sized and located19) NDT technicians qualifications and name

20) Signed stamped and dated

21) Method BS 6443 22)Now replaced by BS EN 9934 Parts 1-3 

Page 296: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 296/302

  1

 Appendix 2

Senior Welding InspectorTechnical Notes Rad. U/T MPI & Penetrant

Radiography:

X ray:

KV as low as possible = best definition. Generally 60kV lowest is OK for lower densityaluminium. Normally a minimum of 140kV is required for steels but must be increasedas thickness increases

Focal spot :  The larger the focal spot the longer must be the FFD

Gamma:  SFD typically 500mm but varies greatly,double the distance = 4 x original exposure

Typical source size of 1.5mm x 1.5mm

Ytterbium: Used on thickness under 12mm (costly)

Iridium 192: Used for applications thickness 12-60mm

Cobalt 60: Used on thickness over 40 -200mm

Lead screens:  0.1mm front and 0.15mm back but often 0.125 front/backUsed on all gamma and X-ray above 120kV

Development:  Typically 4min at 20 ºC

Density:   Typically 2-3.5

Sensitivity:  Typically 2% or less. (IQI dameter of smallest wire/thicknessx 100)

Viewing light conditions: 20 Lux. Viewer able to view up to density of 4.

Minimum screen luminance 100,000 cd/m

2

 

Page 297: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 297/302

  2

 Appendix 2

Senior Welding Inspector

Ultrasonic:Probes:Check for lamination 0º compression probe

Plate thickness <10 mm 70º

Plate thickness 10-15mm 60-70º

Plate thickness 15 + mm 45- 60º

Plate thickness >50 mm 45º only

MHz: Normal welds  4-5MHz larger grains lower value.Higher value = less penRecord crystal size(usually 10mm) single or twin?

Sensitivity:  Which calibration block V1/V2?

Hole diameter + depth (side-drilled hole)

Couplant:  Record of the type used

Page 298: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 298/302

  3

 Appendix 2

Senior Welding Inspector

Magnetic Particle:

Through paint up to 50 microns

With DC sub-surface defects can be detected approximately 2mm deep(depends on strength of current)

 Above 50ºC up to 3150C usually dry powder

Yokes:  No current recorded lift off of > 4.5kgNormally AC but can be DC

Prods:  6 amp/mm of space ie 200mm = 1200 ampsSpace and amperage must be recorded. 7.5–20cm (75–200mm)

 All must record 2 directions at 90º Burmah Castrol Strip type 1 indicationsof 3 lines

Page 299: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 299/302

  4

 Appendix 2

Senior Welding Inspector

Penetrant:

Temperature: 10-50 ºC

Dwell/Contact time 5–60 min

Evaluation time 10–30min

Viewing Light Conditions for Penetrant and MPI:

Normal light: 500 Lux minimum

Fluorescent: Use UVA lamp minimum power 1000 microWatt/cm2 

Light levels: Below 20 Lux ambient light

Page 300: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 300/302

  1

 Appendix 1

CSWIP Senior Welding Inspector

Question:You are required to visit a site on which your inspection team have been working. Thefabrication is now completed in accordance with a nominated specification and isawaiting your final inspection/approval.

Prior to signing the Certificate of Conformance;

1) What questions do you ask?2) What measurements would you take?3) What documents would you review?

Typical answer:

Prior to the site visit it is vital to spend some time planning the visit in order that a logicalapproach be made and that important details are not overlooked. Knowledge of thestandard used and an idea of the service conditions would be useful in assessing thefitness for purpose of the product. A list of all personnel in the inspection team(s) andcontact details of team leader(s) will ensure that relevant personnel are available toanswer questions as required. Types of questions may include any difficultiesencountered with the job, particularly attention being given to those concerning thecontractor. Further information regarding repair rates, safety standards on-site and thegeneral moral and standard of work amongst the inspection team(s) throughoutproduction. Any unusual incidents may also need to be investigated. The availability ofquality plans will help greatly in the planning of the audit. The review/audit of all relevantdocumentation is a major requirement prior to signing any Certificate of Conformance or compliance. In some major standards/codes the list of documents to be includedwithin the fabrication file are listed. In the absence of such the following could beconsidered a basic guide to these documents for review/audit:

1) A review of the quality plan and inspection check list to ensure all stages arecompleted and signed off.

2) Material certificates, mill test reports, and material traceability records aredocumented and accepted. (This may include welding consumables.)

3) Process control procedures should be reviewed for adequacy, accuracy andapproval. These should include approved procedures for cutting, welding, repair,NDT, heat treatment, coating etc.

4) Review of qualifications should include welder approvals, NDT operator ortechnician approvals. All inspection approvals should be in date  at time offabrication and as identified and described within the contract documents.

Page 301: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 301/302

  2

5) Inspection reports should be reviewed and should include visual inspection, NDT,dimensional control, painting/coating etc.

6) If the product is pressure containment ie pressure vessel or high pressure pipelineetc. then hydrostatic testing procedures and a test report/acceptance reports should

be reviewed, along with test gauge calibration certificates and any associateddocumentation.

7) As built drawings showing materials and weld maps should be reviewed forcompleteness.

8) Finally, transit and tie down procedures should all have been approved by therelevant engineer prior to the final acceptance of the product and issue of any signedcertificate of conformance. 

Page 302: 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

7/23/2019 115203138 CSWIP 3-2-2010 WIS10 Senior Welding Inspection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/115203138-cswip-3-2-2010-wis10-senior-welding-inspection 302/302